Professional Documents
Culture Documents
44 Adams/View
2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool
Creates a curve-curve constraint that restricts a curve defined on the first part to remain in contact with
a second curve defined on a second part. The curve-curve constraint is useful for modeling cams where
the point of contact between two parts changes during the motion of the mechanism. The curve-curve
constraint removes three Degrees of freedom from your model.
Learn more about Curve-Curve Constraints.
Do the following:
For the first and second parts, select whether you are defining the curve-curve
constraint along a curve or an edge of a part:
Curves - Splines, chains, and data-element curves are all considered
curves.
Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For
example, you can use a Parasolid object representing a cam that you
imported into Adams/View.
A - D 45
3D Plot Viewer
3D Plot Viewer
Build Data Elements Spline New Type 3D 3D Preview
46 Adams/View
About Adams
About Adams
Help About
A - D 47
About the Adams/View Modeling Database
Names of objects in the database use a hierarchical naming structure. For example, a block built on the
ground part is named .model_1.ground.block.
48 Adams/View
Activate/Deactivate
Activate/Deactivate
Right-click object (De)activate
Sets the Activation status of a selected object and whether or not the objects children inherit the
activation status of the parent.
Learn about About the Adams/View Modeling Database.
Do the following:
Object
Object Active
A - D 49
Adams/Insight Display
Adams/Insight Display
Simulate Adams/Insight Display
Do the following:
Enter the name of the experiment to be opened. The file is saved with an .xml
extension in the current directory.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes
Note:
If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams/View session, you
can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more
efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams/View with the
MDI INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment
after the workspace has been defined, returning to Adams/View, and then issuing the MDI
INSIGHT BUILD command.
simulate
simulate
simulate
simulate
simulate
simulate
simulate
50 Adams/View
Adams/Insight Export
Adams/Insight Export
Simulate Adams/Insight Export
Do the following:
Enter the name of the experiment to be created. The file is saved with an .xml
extension in the current directory.
Model
Enter the name of the model to use for the investigation. The contents of the
specified model will be interrogated to build up the Candidate list of responses and
factors.
Simulation Script
Enter the simulation script you want to use during the experiment.
Reuse Experiment Optionally, enter the name of an existing experiment file. If you enter an
experiment to reuse, Adams/Insight will reuse as many components of the old
experiment as possible in the new experiment. For more information, see Reusing
Components.
A - D 51
Adams/Insight Export
Note:
If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams/View session, you
can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more
efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams/View with the
MDI INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment
after the workspace has been defined, returning to Adams/View, and then issuing the MDI
INSIGHT BUILD command.
simulate
simulate
simulate
simulate
simulate
simulate
simulate
52 Adams/View
Adams/View Keyboard Shortcuts
File Operations
To:
Select:
Ctrl + n
Ctrl + o
Ctrl + s
Ctrl + p
F2
Exit
Ctrl + q
Edit Operations
To:
Select:
Ctrl + z
Ctrl- Shift + z
Copy objects
Ctrl + c
Ctrl + v
Ctrl + x
Del
Modify object
Ctrl + e
Escape operation
Esc
A - D 53
Adams/View Keyboard Shortcuts
Display Operations
To display:
Select:
Command window
F3
Coordinate window
F4
Menu Builder
F5
F6
Working grid
F8
Help window
F1
Viewing Operations
To:
Select:
s (lowercase)
Translate view
Shift
Center view
Fit view
Ctrl + F
S (Uppercase)
54 Adams/View
Adams/View Keyboard Shortcuts
Drawing Operations
To:
Ctrl
Ctrl
A - D 55
Adams2Nastran
Adams2Nastran
Simulate Adams2Nastran
Export a linearized NASTRAN model from Adams at the current-time/dynamic/kinematic/static/quasistatic equilibrium operating point.
Do the following:
Model Name
Type
Choose the type of export, that is low fidelity (white box) or high fidelity
(black box)
Nastran Output File Prefix Choose the file prefix to be used for the exported Nastran file(s).
Operating Point
Choose the operating point at which the model will be exported (options
are current-time, dynamic, kinematic, static and quasi-static)
If you chose current-time then Adams exports a NASTRAN model immediately with no further analysis
specification, in other words model is exported at any current and valid operating point (i.e. static,
quasi-static, dynamic, and kinematic)
If you chose a dynamic/kinematic/quasi-static operating point following four options will be available
End Time
Duration
Number Of Steps
Step Size
Write To Terminal
Select if the output file is to be displayed in the info window after the
export operation
56 Adams/View
Add/Replace Simulations
Add/Replace Simulations
File Replace Simulations
Updates the data in the plots with that stored in simulation result files, without recreating the plots. Also
lets you add data from other Simulations to your existing plots.
When you update your plots, Adams/PostProcessor looks for simulation results in the original simulation
Results file (for example, a Request file) from which you imported the current data. If the time and date
stamp on the original file is more recent than the time and date stamp on the plot, Adams/PostProcessor
reloads the plot with the updated data.
If you use the Add Simulation option, a new legend, called the simulation legend, appears on the left side
of the plot. The simulation legend identifies the source of the data grouped by color or line style. The
original legend, called the curve legend, continues to show information about the original curves.
Do the following:
Select to add new curves.
Enter the name of the simulation containing the simulation results to be replaced.
By default, the results of the last simulation (Last_run) replaces any simulation
results that the curves use.
You can:
Select Auto to allow Adams/PostProcessor to automatically assign
Clear the selection of Auto to use the pull-down menu to set the colors,
Select the pages containing the plots that you want to update. Enter a range of
pages in the Start Page and End Page text boxes.
A - D 57
Aggregate Mass
Aggregate Mass
Tools Aggregate Mass
Calculates the total mass of a part or parts in your model. Adams/View returns the information in the
Information window or in a specified file. It ignores the ground part or any part that has no mass.
By default, Adams/View calculates all location coordinates and orientation angles in the current global
coordinate system. You can select a different coordinate system or reference frame relative to which you
would like the coordinates and angles returned. When you express the aggregate mass in the global
coordinate system, Adams/View essentially places a temporary marker at the center of mass location and
then it provides the inertia properties about the CM location with respect to the global coordinate system
orientation.
The orientation shown is the orientation of the principal moments of inertia.
Learn about Calculating Aggregate Mass of Parts.
Do the following:
Model
Enter the name of the model whose parts you want to calculate total mass for.
Bodies
Select
Relative To
Optional. Enter another coordinate system with respect to which you'd like
calculations to be relative. Default calculations are relative to the global coordinate
system.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Info Window
File
Brief Output
58 Adams/View
Angle Measure
Angle Measure
Build Measure Angle New/Modify
Do the following:
Measure Name
First Marker
Enter the marker that defines the tip of the first vector.
Middle Marker
Last Marker
Enter the marker that defines the tip of the second vector.
A - D 59
Animation Controls
Animation Controls
Review Animation Controls
Main toolbox
Allows you to work with Animations and control the frames from your simulation. Animations provide
instant feedback to you as your simulation runs.
By default, each time you run a simulation, Adams/Solver replaces the previous animation frames. To
replay earlier animations, you must save them in your modeling database.
60 Adams/View
Animation Controls
During animations, Adams/View displays frames as quickly as it can based on the graphics capabilities
of your computer hardware.
A - D 61
Animation Controls
Option/Icon
Description
Plays the animation backward.
Stops the animation.
Plays the animation forward.
Rewinds the animation.
Advances one frame.
Rewinds one frame.
Plays the animation in fast-backward mode.
Plays the animation in fast-forward mode.
Slider
Click and drag until you reach the number of the frame you want to display.
Base Part/
Fixed Base/
Std Camera
Lets you set the view perspective or camera angle for an Animation. Setting
different animation view perspectives can be especially useful when parts
undergo large motions and move off your screen during an animation, such
as with vehicle simulations.
Learn about Specifying the View Perspective of Animations.
Contour plots
Toggles the display of Contour plots of flexible bodies. The default is set to
off to improve the speed of the animation, and to remove any caching of the
animation before playing it.
To learn about setting defaults for caching animations see PPT Preferences
- Animation.
62 Adams/View
Animation Controls
Option/Icon
Cycles/Loop
Description
Sets how many times to replay the animation. The default is to play the
specified sequence of frames once.
In the Cycles box, enter a whole number representing the number of times
you want Adams/View to play the animation. It automatically rewinds the
animation before each replay.
Displays the full Animation Controls dialog box.
Render
Icons
Analysis
View
any view window that is currently visible on your screen. The default
name is the currently active view.
Play animation in multiple view windows at the same time by entering
No Trace/Trace
You can trace the paths of points during animation. See Tracing Paths of
Points During Animations.
A - D 63
Animation Controls
Option/Icon
Time Range
Description
Defines a subset of the complete sequence of frames in an animation to
play. By default, Adams/View plays the complete sequence of frames. You
can set the interval to view based on time or frame number.
Choose from:
Time Range - Enter a start time and stop time in the text box.
Frame
Increment
Superimpose
Learn about:
Using Animations
Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes
64 Adams/View
Append Run Commands
parameters.
Look at your aview.Log file to see the commands that have been executed and their syntax.
Do the following:
Select the simulation operation that youd like to add to your script. For example,
select Transient - Dynamic to enter a command for performing a dynamic
simulation.
Options for the operation you selected appear in the dialog box. For example, text
boxes and option button appear for setting the duration of a simulation.
If you select Transient - Dynamic or Transient - Kinematic, the following options appear:
Start at
equilibrium
End
Time/Duration
Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how you want
it defined. You can select:
End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want the
simulation to stop.
Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the simulation to
run.
Steps/Step Size
Set the frequency with which Adams/View outputs data during your simulation.
You can specify:
Steps - Represents the total number of times you want Adams/View to provide
output information over your entire simulation. For example, specify 50 steps
over a 1-second simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds
per step, which yields an output frequency of 50 steps/second.
Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units, between
output steps. The output frequency remains constant even if you change your
simulation end time or duration. For example, enter a step size of 0.01 seconds
to specify an output period of 0.01 seconds per step, which yields an output
frequency of 100 steps/second.
If you select Transient - Static Steps/Step Size and End Time/Durations options appear
If you select Equilibrium no other options will appear
A - D 65
Append Run Commands
Do the following:
Generate
Eigenvectors
Select if the output file is to be displayed in the info window after the export
operation
Type
Choose the type of export, that is low fidelity (white box) or high fidelity (black
box)
Nastran Output
File Prefix
Choose the file prefix to be used for the exported Nastran file(s).
Configuration File
Name
If you select Nastran Export - Quasi Static along with the options for Nastran Export - Static, Steps/Step
Size and End Time/Duration options appear:
If you select Sate Matrix following options appear:
Plant Input
Plant Output
Matrix Format
Specify a file name to which Adams/Solver (C++) writes the state matrices. If the
output is in the MATRIXX format, all matrices are written to this file. For the
MATLAB format, the file name is used as a base name. Each matrix is written to
a separate file, whose name Adams/Solver (C++) automatically constructs by
appending the matrix name to the user-specified base name.
Do a simulation
single_run reset
first
Select if you would like to reset the simulation controls to their initial configuration
OK
Will insert the appropriate Adams/View commands based on the options and
entries you selected/specified
Cancel
66 Adams/View
Arc Tool
Arc Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Arc Tool
Creates arcs and circles centered about a location. You begin drawing an arc by specifying its starting and
ending angles. You then indicate its center location and set its radius and the orientation of its x-axis. You
can also specify the arcs radius before you draw it. The Arc tool draws the angle starting from the x-axis
that you specify and moving counterclockwise (right-hand rule).
See Elements of an arc.
Before you create arc geometry, you can select to create a new part consisting of the arc geometry or add
the arc geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed
of only wire geometry. You can extrude a circle into solid geometry that has mass. Learn about Extruding
Construction Geometry Along a Path.
Learn about Creating Arcs and Circles.
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the arc to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the arc to ground.
Tip:
Radius
Start Angle
Enter the angle at which to start the arc. The default is to create a 90-degree arc
from a starting angle of 0 degrees.
End Angle
Circle
A - D 67
Assembly Measure
Assembly Measure
Creates a measure on an assembly.
See Measures and Assemblies.
Do the following:
Measure Name
Object
Characteristic
68 Adams/View
Associativity
Associativity
Database Navigator Associativity
Allows you to display the objects that a selected object uses. For example, you can select a joint in the
tree list to show the I and J markers that the joint uses. You can also select to view the objects that use
the selected object.
Learn about Viewing the Associativity of Objects.
Do the following:
Uses
Select if you want to show the objects that the selected object uses.
Is Used By
Select if you want to show the objects that use the selected object.
Auto Navigate
Save to File
A - D 69
Auto Disable Modes by Strain Energy
Lets you disable or enable modes based on their contribution of strain energy. Learn more about Enabling
and Disabling Modes Based on Strain Energy Contribution.
Do the following:
Flexible Body Name Enter the name of the flexible body to modify.
Analysis Name
Energy Tolerance
Enter a fractional value. Adams/Flex will disable all modes that contributed less
than the specified fraction to the total strain energy during the test simulation.
For example, to disable all modes that contributed less than 0.1% of the strain
energy, enter 0.001.
70 Adams/View
Background Color Tool Stack
Contains four colors to which you can set the background of the View window.
A - D 71
Beam
Beam
Build Forces Beam Tool
72 Adams/View
Bode Plots
Bode Plots
Plot Bode Plots
Creates a Bode plot in Adams/PostProcessor. Bode plots provide a way to study frequency response
functions (FRFs) for linear systems and linearized representations of nonlinear systems. The frequency
response function measures the response at the outputs due to unit harmonic excitation at the inputs at
various frequencies. A Bode plot in Adams/PostProcessor shows the amplitude gain and the phase shift
between input to output for all output/input combinations of the linear system.
Do the following:
Select the type of input format.
Learn about Ways to Construct Bode Plots.
The elements in the dialog box change depending on the input format you selected. You can select any
one of the following input formats:
Adams/Linear State Matrices
Adams Matrices
Linear State Equation
TFSISO
Transfer Function Coefficients
Time Domain Measures
Time Domain Results Set Components
Adams/Linear State
Matrices
frequencies for the bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
In the State Matrices text box, the state matrices.
In the Inputs and Outputs text boxes, the input and output results
you would like to use for bode plot calculations. If you do not select
any inputs or outputs, Adams/PostProcessor computes all
combinations.
A - D 73
Bode Plots
Do the following:
Enter values for the following:
The frequency sweep by entering the starting and ending
frequencies for the bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
In the A through D Matrix text boxes, the A through D matrices
you would like to use for bode plot calculations. If you do not select
any inputs or outputs, Adams/PostProcessor computes all
combinations.
Linear State Equation
frequencies for the bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
In the Linear State Equation text box, the linear state equation to
be plotted.
In the Inputs and Outputs text boxes, the input and output results
you would like to use for bode plot calculations. If you do not select
any inputs or outputs, Adams/PostProcessor computes all
combinations.
TFSISO
frequencies for the bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
In the TFSISO text box, the transfer function to be plotted.
Transfer Function
Coefficients
frequencies for the Bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
In the Numerator Coefficients text box, the coefficients of the
74 Adams/View
Bode Plots
Do the following:
Enter values for the following:
In the Input Measure text box, the pre-defined or user-defined
A - D 75
Bodies
Bodies
Displays tools for creating rigid body geometry.
Icon
Link
Solids
Icon
Link
Construction
Box Tool
Point Tool
Cylinder Tool
Marker Tool
Sphere Tool
Polyline Tool
Frustum Tool
Arc Tool
Torus Tool
Spline Tool
Link Tool
Point Mass
Plate Tool
Booleans
Extrusion Tool
Unite Tool
Revolution Tool
Merge Tool
Plane Tool
Intersect Tool
76 Adams/View
Bodies
Icon
Link
Icon
Flexible Bodies
Link
Cut Tool
Adams/Flex
Split Tool
Flex to Flex
Chain Tool
Features
Rigid to Flex
Fillet Tool
MNX Xform
Chamfer Tool
ViewFlex
Hole Tool
Boss Tool
Hollow Tool
Construction or
Settings
Container
Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change
depending on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when
you create a link, Adams/View lets you specify its width, length, and height
before creating it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set
regardless of how you move the mouse. You can also define design variables
or expressions for many values.
A - D 77
Border and Separation
Allows you to enter values to be used by the Dialog-Box Builder functions that change the geometry of
Interface objects such as align, move, and create predefined. See Aligning Interface Objects and Moving
Interface Objects for more information.
Do the following:
Horizontal Border Width Enter a value to specify the horizontal distance from the object to the dialog
box border.
Vertical Border Width
Enter a value to specify the vertical distance from the object to the dialog
box border.
Horizontal Separation
Enter a value to specify the horizontal distance between dialog box objects.
Vertical Separation
Enter a value to specify the vertical distance between dialog box objects.
78 Adams/View
Boss Tool
Boss Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Boss Tool
As you create a boss, you can specify its radius and height.
Learn about Creating a Hole or Boss.
Do the following:
Radius
Height
A - D 79
Box Tool
Box Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Box Tool
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the box to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the box to ground.
Tip:
Length
Height
Depth
Enter the depth of the box. If you do not specify a depth, Adams/View creates a
solid box with a depth that is twice that of the shortest dimension of the box (d = 2
* min(l,h)).
80 Adams/View
Box Tool
Note:
One hotpoint appears after you draw the box. It lets you modify the length, height, and
depth of the box. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry
A - D 81
Bushing Tool
Bushing Tool
Build Forces Bushing Tool
A bushing is a linear force that represents the forces acting between two parts over a distance. The
bushing applies a force and a torque. You define the force and torque using six components (Fx, Fy, Fz,
Tx, Ty, Tz).
To define a bushing, you need to create two markers, one for each part. The marker on the first part that
you specify is called the I marker. The marker on the second part that you specify is called the J marker.
Learn about:
Bushings
Do the following:
Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes
of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector
you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams/View automatically
calculates the x- and y-axes.
Translational K
Translational C
Rotational K
Translational C
82 Adams/View
CatiaV4, CatiaV5, STEP, IGES, Acis, VDA ('Adams CAD Translators' only)
A - D 83
CatiaV4, CatiaV5, STEP, IGES, Acis, VDA ('Adams CAD Translators' only)
Do the following:
File Type
Set to type of geometry that you want to export (CatiaV4, CatiaV5, STEP,
IGES, Acis, VDA).
File Name
Enter the name of the file that you want to create. The file will contain the
exported CAD geometry. You do not need to enter a file extension. Adams
automatically generates the appropriate extension for the type of geometry
you are exporting. For example, if you are exporting IGES geometry, Adams
adds an .igs extension.
Part/Model/Analysis
Name
Select the geometry that you want to export, and then enter the name of the
geometry in the text box next to the pull-down menu. You can select:
Model Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View model to be written
to the CAD file. Adams places each rigid body in the model on a
separate level. All geometry written to the IGES file is defined with
respect to the global coordinate system of the Adams/View model.
Part Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View part to be written to
the CAD file. Adams writes all the geometry owned by the part to the
CAD file. It defines all geometry in the CAD file with respect to the
part coordinate system.
Analysis Name - Lets you export a model at a particular simulation
Select to write a verbose log file to the disk. A message will be displayed
indicating the log file to which the translation operation details have been
written.
Translation Options
Note:
The translation via 'Adams CAD Translators' is applicable for STEP and IGES only if
MSC_GEOM_TRANSLATE_INTEROP is set to an integral value of 1.
84 Adams/View
Chain Tool
Chain Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Chain Tool
Links together wire Construction geometry to create a complex profile, which you can then extrude. The
geometry to be chained together must touch at one endpoint and cannot be closed geometry.
The Chain tool adds the final chained geometry to the part that owns the first geometry that you selected
Note:
If you want to use the chained geometry with a pin-in-slot or curve-to-curve constraint, you
must turn the geometry into a spline. See the Spline Tool.
A - D 85
Chamfer Tool
Chamfer Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Chamfer Tool
Note:
You will get different results when you chamfer one edge at a time than when you chamfer
all edges at once. Also, you may not be able to chamfer an edge if an adjoining edge has
already been chamfered. It depends on the complexity of the chamfering.
Do the following:
Specify the width of the bevel.
Learn about:
Chamfering and Filleting Objects
Fillet Tool
86 Adams/View
Clearance Compute
Clearance Compute
Tools Clearance Compute
When you request to run a Clearance study, Adams/PostProcessor calculates the minimum and
maximum distances between a pair of objects using data from a selected Simulation. It adds the
information to the animation associated with the simulation, which you can subsequently run. You can
also generate a report of the data and plot it.
Note:
The number of frames in your animation can have a significant effect on the accuracy of
the distances reported. Therefore, for best results, we recommend that you perform at least
one clearance study with a large number of frames in the animation (time steps in the
simulation).
Do the following:
Simulation
Select the simulation data against which you want to run the clearance study.
Treat Flexible
Bodies as Rigid
Select if you want to calculate the clearance study as if flexible bodies were
rigid. This reduces computations and allows the clearance study to run faster but
does not give you information about the effects of flexibility.
A - D 87
Clearance Export Results
Do the following:
File Name
Enter the name of the file to which to export the clearance study.
Simulation
Enter the name of the Simulation result against which you created the clearance
study.
88 Adams/View
Color Picker
Color Picker
Settings Colors Color Picker
Lets you select a basic color or create a custom color to be used for displaying objects and the background
of the Main window and any View windows that you create.
Do the following:
Select a color from the 48 basic colors available.
Tip: You can define a custom color by clicking the closest basic color,
modifying it, and then selecting Add to Custom Colors.
Custom Colors
Select an empty box to create a custom color or select a custom color you've
already defined so you can modify it.
Color Matrix
Click anywhere to select a custom color. Use the pointer to change the hue
and Saturation. Change hue by moving the pointer horizontally; change
saturation by moving the pointer vertically.
Luminosity Slider
Hue
Saturation
Value
Red
Specify the amount of red in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Green
Specify the amount of green in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Blue
Specify the amount of blue in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Select to add the color currently displayed in the color matrix to the palette
of custom colors.
A - D 89
Command File
Command File
Settings Command File
Allows you to specify whether Adams/View displays the command that it executes in the Command
window or displays the results of the commands on the screen. In addition, it lets you specify what
Adams/View should do when it encounters an error while reading an Adams/View command file.
Learn more with Import - Adams/View Command Files dialog box help.
Do the following:
Echo Commands
Update Screen
Select if you want to see the results of the commands in the main window. If
you do not select this, Adams/View displays the results when it finishes
reading the command file.
Ignore Command
Select if you want Adams/View to ignore the line on which it found the error
and start processing the next line as a new command.
Note:
Abort Execution
90 Adams/View
Command Navigator
Command Navigator
Tools Command Navigator
Enables you to enter Adams/View commands without having to know the entire syntax of the commands.
The Command Navigator displays a list of all Adams/View command Keywords. A plus (+) in front of a
keyword indicates that the command has more keywords below it but they are hidden. A minus (-)
indicates that all keywords below the keyword are displayed. No indicator in front of a keyword indicates
that there are no more keywords below the object. When you select an object with no indicator, a dialog
box appears in which you enter parameters for executing the command.
Learn about:
Showing, Hiding, or Selecting Keywords
Getting help in the Command Navigator
A - D 91
Command Window
Command Window
View Command Window
F3
Provides a text-based way to enter Adams/View commands. Learn About Adams/View Commands. It
assumes that you understand the Adams/View command language underlying the Adams/View interface.
The command window contains both a command entry area for entering commands and a command
information area for displaying informational and error messages:
92 Adams/View
Comments
Comments
Database Navigator Comments
Do the following:
Text Box
Apply
Save to File
A - D 93
Compute Linear Modes dialog box
Adams/Solver (C++only). Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.
Lets you run a linear simulation using a plant state. Learn about Creating Plant States.
Do the following:
Specify the plant state to be used to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme.
94 Adams/View
Compute and Export Linear States
Generates a state-space matrix representation of your mechanical system, for use with a control system
design application, such as MATLAB, MATRIXx, or EASY5.
Do the following:
Name
Plant Input
Specify the plant input that Adams/Solver uses as plant inputs in the state matrices
computation. If you do not specify a plant input, Adams/Solver does not output the
B and D matrices. Learn about creating plant inputs with Data Element Create
Plant State dialog box help.
Plant Output
Specify the plant output that Adams/Solver uses as plant outputs in the state
matrices computation. If you do not specify a plant output, Adams/Solver does not
output the C and D matrices. Learn about creating Data Element Create Plant
Outputs.
Plant State
Specify a plant state to be used to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme. Learn about Creating Plant States. Adams/Solver C++ only.
Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
Specify the name of the software in whose input format Adams/Solver is to output
the state matrices. Currently, two software formats are supported: MATRIXx
(FSAVE format) and MATLAB (ASCII flat file format).
A - D 95
Connectors
Connectors
Displays tools for creating joints. The tab contains the entire library of joints.
Icon
Link
Joints
Icon
Link
Primitives
Fixed Joint Tool
Couplers
Special
96 Adams/View
Connectors
Icon
Link
Icon
Link
Point-Curve Constraint Tool
Create/Modify General
Constraint
2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool
Construction
or Settings
Container
Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending
on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link,
Adams/View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it.
Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move
the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
A - D 97
Constant-Velocity Joint Tool
Creates a constant-velocity joint that allows two rotations on one part with respect to another part, while
remaining coincident and maintaining a constant velocity through the spin axis.
98 Adams/View
Constant-Velocity Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want to connect the joint to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
Learn about Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Geometry Feature
A - D 99
Constraint Create Complex Joint Gear
Creates a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the common
velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact. Learn more About Gears.
Do the following:
Gear Name
Enter the name for the gear. If you are creating a gear, Adams/View assigns a
default name to the gear.
Adams Id
Enter a positive integer for the ID or enter 0 to let Adams/Solver set the ID for
you. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments
Add any comments about the gear to help you manage and identify the gear. See
Comments.
100 Adams/View
Constraint Create Complex Joint Gear
Do the following:
Joint Name
Common Velocity
Marker
Enter the marker defining the point of contact between the geared parts. You
need to make sure the z-axis of the CV marker points in the direction of motion
of the gear teeth that are in contact. The following figure shows how the z-axis
of the CV marker is tangent to the pitch circle of the spur gears.
To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and then
select Create.
Tip:
A - D 101
Constraint Modify Complex Joint Gear
Modifies a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the
common velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact. Learn more About Gears.
Do the following:
Gear Name
Adams Id
Enter a positive integer for the ID or enter 0 to let Adams/Solver set the ID
for you. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments
Add any comments about the gear to help you manage and identify the gear.
See Comments.
102 Adams/View
Constraint Modify Complex Joint Gear
Do the following:
Joint Name
Common Velocity
Marker
Enter the marker defining the point of contact between the geared parts. You
need to make sure the z-axis of the CV marker points in the direction of
motion of the gear teeth that are in contact. The following figure shows how
the z-axis of the CV marker is tangent to the pitch circle of the spur gears.
To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and
then select Create.
Tip:
A - D 103
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve
Changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a 2D curve-curve constraint. Learn more with
2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool.
Note:
You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
Do the following:
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the 2D curve-curve to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
I Curve Name
Change the curve that defines the shape of the curve that moves along the
second curve (J curve). You can enter a curve on a part or a curve element.
Learn about working with Curves.
J Curve Name
Change the curve that defines the shape of the curve along which the first
curve (I curve) moves. You can enter a curve on a part or a curve element.
Learn about working with Curves.
Enter a marker that is fixed on the part containing the first curve (I curve).
Adams/View uses the reference marker to associate the shape defined by
the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve
coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the
reference marker.
Enter a marker that is fixed on the part containing the second curve (J
curve). Adams/View uses the reference marker to associate the shape
defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The
curve coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the
reference marker.
104 Adams/View
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve
Do the following:
Select either:
I Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the first
curve (I curve). If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve,
Adams/View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you
specify. By default, you specify the initial point of contact in the
coordinate system of the part containing the curve or specify it in
the coordinate system of the marker you specify for I Ic Ref Marker
Name.
No I Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
J Displacement Ic/ No J
Displacement Ic
Select either:
J Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the
second curve (J curve). If the point you specify is not exactly on the
curve, Adams/View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point
you specify. By default, you specify the initial point of contact in
the coordinate system of the part containing the curve or specify it
in the coordinate system of the marker you specify for J Ic Ref
Marker Name.
No J Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
I Velocity Ic/No I
Velocity Ic
Select either:
I Velocity - Enter the initial velocity of the contact point along the
first curve (I curve). This is the speed at which the contact point is
initially moving relative to the curve. The velocity is:
Negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the
curve.
Positive if it is moving towards the end of the curve.
Zero if it is stationary on the curve.
No I Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
A - D 105
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve
Do the following:
Select either:
J Velocity- Enter the initial velocity of the contact point along the
second curve (J curve). This is the speed at which the contact point
is initially moving relative to the curve. The velocity is:
Negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the
curve.
Positive if it is moving toward the end of the curve.
Zero if it is stationary on the curve.
No J Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
You can:
Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact
You can:
Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact
106 Adams/View
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve
Changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a point-curve constraint. Learn more with
Point-Curve Constraint Tool.
Learn more about Working with Higher-Pair Constraints.
Note:
You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
Do the following:
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the constraint to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Curve Name
Change the curve that defines the shape on which the point can move. You
can enter a curve on a part or a curve element. Learn about working with
Curves.
I Marker Name
A - D 107
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve
Do the following:
Enter a marker that is a floating marker. Adams/Solver positions the origin
of the floating marker at the instantaneous point of contact on the curve. It
orients the marker so that its x-axis is tangent to the curve at the contact
point, its y-axis points outward from the curves center of curvature at the
contact point, and its z-axis is along the binormal at the contact point.
.
Enter marker that is fixed on the part containing the curve on which the point
must move. Adams/Solver uses the reference marker to associate the shape
defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve
coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference
marker.
Displacement Ic/ No
Displacement Ic
Select either:
Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the curve.
108 Adams/View
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve
Do the following:
Select either:
Velocity Ic - Velocity with which the point (I marker) moves along
the curve. You specify the velocity in the coordinate system of the
part containing the curve.
No I Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
You can:
Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve
is specified.
Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part
A - D 109
Controls_measure_panel
Controls_measure_panel
Modify Controls Block dialog box Output Measure button
Do the following:
Name
Controls Block
110 Adams/View
Coordinate System
Coordinate System
Settings Coordinate System
Main toolbox Move toolstack Coordinate System Tool
Lets you set the default coordinate system for a Modeling database.
Learn about Coordinate Systems in Adams/View.
Do the following:
Select the type of location coordinate systems:
Cartesian.
Cylindrical.
Spherical.
Rotation Sequence
A - D 111
Coupler Joint Tool
It relates the translational and/or rotational motion of the joints through a linear scaling of the relative
motions or through nonlinear relationships that you define by entering parameters to be passed to a userwritten subroutine that is linked into Adams/View. Couplers are useful if your model uses belts and
pulleys or chains and sprockets to transfer motion and energy. Although you can couple only two or three
joints, more than one coupler can come from the same joint, as shown in the figure above.
When you create a coupler, you can only create a two-joint coupler. You select the driver joint, the joint
to which the second joint is coupled, and the coupled joint, the joint that follows the driver joint. To
specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to create a three-joint coupler, you
modify the coupler.
Learn about Creating Couplers.
112 Adams/View
Create Butterworth Filter
Creates a Butterworth filter to define the coefficients of a transfer function when creating a curve filter
function. The first four options in the dialog box are the same as when you are creating a Butterworth
filter directly. See Create/Modify Filter Function dialog box help. To generate these options based on
Passband and Stopband options, select the Generate Filter Order _ Frequency checkbox.
Learn about Filtering Curve Data.
Do the following:
Digital/Analog
Filter Type
frequencies.
Band Stop - Removes frequencies between the two cutoff
frequencies.
Order
Set how much the filter will have damped the signal at the cutoff frequency,
often referred to as how sharp the filter is.
First-order filter damps 3dB at the cutoff frequency.
Second-order filter damps 6dB.
Third-order filter damps 9dB.
Scaled Cutoff
Frequency
(rad/s or Hz). If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop for Filter
Type, you must provide two cutoff frequencies.
A - D 113
Create Butterworth Filter
Do the following:
Select to enable more options to define the Butterworth filter, and use those
options to define the order and cutoff frequency above.
If you selected Generate Filter Order _ Frequency, the options listed below appear.
Using the notation Passband Corner Frequency=fp and Corner Frequency=fs, the following rules apply
for the options below:
To create a low-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp < fs.
To create a high-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp > fs.
To create a bandpass filter, specify two values each for fp and fs, such that fs1< fp1< fp2 < fs2.
Enter the frequency where the damping is at least Passband Ripple dB.
Stopband Attenuation
(Rs) (Hz - for analog)
Generate Order _
Frequency
114 Adams/View
Create Clearance
Create Clearance
Tools Clearance Create
Do the following:
Model
I Body
J Body
Name
Enter a name for the study. If you are creating several studies (by selecting more
than one I and J body), you can enter a base name for the studies, and
Adams/PostProcessor will add a suffix to the name (base_1, base_2, and so on).
Maximum
Set the maximum distance for the clearance beyond which clearances will not
be computed at any given frame. Leave the text box empty if you always want
to calculate the minimum distance.
Method
A - D 115
Create Design Constraint
Note:
You do not need to create an explicit constraint to limit the value of a design variable. You
can do this directly by setting properties for the variable.
Constraints can involve the simulation results, but are not required to do so. You can constrain overall
size, weight, or other factors that depend only on model data. In these cases, use the function or
macro/variable option for the constraint, and ignore the analysis data that Adams/View supplies. Instead,
compute the constraint directly from the appropriate model data.
Do the following:
Name
Definition by
Select the type of function you want to use from the pull-down
menu.
Enter the name of the measure, result set component, function, or
macro and variable. If you are entering a Result set component,
enter the name of the result set and component, for example req1.x.
Select a value.
Select to add comments to help you manage and identify the
constraint object. See Comments.
116 Adams/View
Create Design Objective
Allows you to create an objective object if a measure is not flexible enough. Objective objects have
options for processing simulation results and are valuable when you want to do complex or multi-step
computations on model outputs.
Learn more about Creating an Objective Object.
Do the following:
Name
Definition by
Note:
Tip:
Measure/Result Set
Comp./Function/Va
riable and Macro
Objectives usually involve simulation results, but they are not required
to do so. You can create an objective that depends only on the model
data, such as overall weight or size. You can then use Adams/View to
vary, or even optimize, the design variables and immediately see the
results on the model.
In this case, use the function or variable/macro option for the
objective, and ignore the analysis argument or parameter that
Adams/View supplies. Because you do not need simulation results,
you should also create a dummy simulation script that does
nothing. Then, Adams/View repeatedly sets the variables and
evaluates the objective, but does not run any simulations.
Enter the name of the measure, result set component, function, or macro and
variable. If you are entering a result set component, enter the name of the result
set and component, for example req1.x.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
A - D 117
Create Design Objective
Do the following:
If you are using a measure or result set component, set the design objectives
value. For a measure, enter minimum, maximum, average, last value, absolute
minimum, and absolute maximum of the measure. For a results set component,
enter minimum, maximum, average, or last value of the result set component.
Select to add any comments for the objective to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
118 Adams/View
Create FEMDATA
Create FEMDATA
Build Data Elements FEMdata New/Modify
Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite
element or fatigue life analysis for use in third-party products. You use the Settings Solver Output
More Durability Files to specify the type of file to produce (for more information, see Solver
Settings - Output dialog box help and the Adams/Durability online help). Adams/View will not output to
any files unless you specify the format. For more information, see About Setting Simulation Controls.
Do the following:
Enter the name of the FEMDATA element in the Modeling database to create or
modify.
Type
and applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and,
optionally, inertial forces of the specified body (angular velocity and
acceleration, including effects of gravity) as a function of time. Load
data will be output in the simulation set of units.
Modal Deformation - Outputs modal deformations as a function of
A - D 119
Create FEMDATA
Do the following:
Check Inertia if you want Adams/View to include inertial loads (linear
acceleration, angular acceleration, and velocity) when outputting the loads
acting on the body. Otherwise, Adams/View outputs no inertial loads and you
will need to rely on an inertia relief capability in the finite element program to
balance the external loads with the internal loads.
Enter the rigid body marker to be the reference coordinate system to output
loads. Because Adams/Solver resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the
coordinate system of the specified marker, the marker should represent the FEA
basic coordinate system of the part's finite element (FE) model.
Peak Slice
Select that FE model load data are to be output only at those time steps where
the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When you set the Time
options, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for
the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG, TX,
TY, TZ, and TMAG.
Flex Body
Enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs
the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Peak Slice
Select that FE model load data are to be output only at those time steps where
the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When you set the Time
options, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for
the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG, TX,
TY, TZ, and TMAG.
Enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs
the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs
the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
120 Adams/View
Create FEMDATA
Do the following:
Nodes
Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do
not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point
of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node ID is specified that
does not belong to the flexible body.
Datum
Enter a node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of the nodal displacements.
Adams/Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to this node ID. If you
do not specify a datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of
nodal displacements. It displays a warning message if the specified node does
not belong to the flexible body.
On Nodes/Hot Spots Lets you select either output on nodes or Hotspots. The options in the dialog box
change depending on the selection, as explained in the next rows of the table.
For an example of defining hot spots, see the FEMDATA statement and near the
end of it, the Definition of Hotspots.
If you selected On Nodes, the following options appear:
Nodes
Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do
not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point
of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that
does not belong to the flexible body.
R Marker
Enter a coordinate reference marker in the model that will be used to transform
the stress or strain data. If not specified, the stress or strain will be output in the
basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be
useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the orientation
of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate system, you can
reference a marker whose orientation does match.
Enter the number of hot spots to locate and output. With this option, a text file
containing a tab-delimited table of hot spot information, such as node ID,
maximum value, time when the maximum value occurred, and location, is
generated.
Note:
When you set the Time options, Adams/Durability only checks the
time steps within those specifications for the hot spots.
A - D 121
Create FEMDATA
Do the following:
Von Mises/Max
Prin/Min Prin.,/Max
Shear/NormalX/NormalY/Normal-Z/ShearXY/ShearYZ/Shear-ZX
Radius
Enter a radius that defines the spherical extent of each hotspot. A default value
of 0.0 (zero) means that all nodes in the flexible body will be hotspot candidates.
R Marker
Enter a coordinate reference marker in the model that will be used to transform
the stress or strain data. If not specified, the stress or strain will be output in the
basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be
useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the orientation
of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate system, one can reference
a marker whose orientation does match.
Enter the output file name for the FE model data. You can specify an existing
directory, root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be
composed of the Adams run and body IDs according to the type of data and file
format that you specified in Solver Settings Output More Durability
Files (for more information, see the Adams/Durability online help).
Time
Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:
From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default
122 Adams/View
Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack
Displays tools for creating forces. The Create Forces palette and tool stack are shown below. Learn about
Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes. Learn more about Forces.
A - D 123
Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack
Icon
Link
Translational Spring Damper Tool
Single-Component Force tool
Create/Modify Contact
Torsion SpringTool
Single-Component Torque tool
Bushing Tool
Six-Component General Force tool
Create/Modify Modal Force
Field Element Tool
Three-Component Force tool
Gravity
Beam
124 Adams/View
Create New Color
Defines a new color name in the Modeling database. After creating the new color, return to Edit Color
dialog box to define its red, green, and blue values.
Do the following:
Enter the name of the new color.
A - D 125
Create Run-Time Clearance
Run-Time Clearances can be used to monitor the clearance distance between two selected
geometries/flexible bodies. This clearance distance is based upon tesselation of geometry or analytical
representation of known geometry. For flexible parts, clearance is based upon the external face geometry
in the MNF. After a simulation is complete, the minimum clearance location between the two
geometries/flexible bodies may be animated. This is represented as a line between the objects involved.
You can also plot the clearance result sets and export the clearance data in the results file.
Do the following:
Clearance Name
Clearance Type
Threshold
Optional field to allow the user to specify a maximum distance for which
the clearance calculations will not be computed. Set to 0.0 by default.
If you selected Geometry to Geometry, Adams/View displays the following two options:
I Geometry
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same
part.
J Geometry
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same
part.
If you selected Geometry to Flexible Body, Adams/View displays the following four options:
I Geometry
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same
part.
J Flexible Body
J Region
This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of
specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered,
then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. J
Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by rightclicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node"
option.Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the
nodes with the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse
button to finish.
Exclusion Radius
Specifies the radius for excluding connection between the two parts
selected for clearance analysis. The nodes that lie in the specified radius of
any joints connecting the specified J flexible body and the I Geometry will
be excluded from the clearance computation.
If you selected Flexible Body to Geometry Adams/View displays the following four options:
126 Adams/View
Create Run-Time Clearance
Do the following:
I Flex Body
I Region
This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of
specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered,
then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. I
Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by rightclicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node" option.
Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the nodes with
the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse button to finish.
J Geometry
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same
part.
Exclusion Radius
Specifies the radius for excluding connection between the two parts
selected for clearance analysis. The nodes that lie in the specified radius of
any joints connecting the specified I flexible body and the J Geometry will
be excluded from the clearance computation.
If you selected Flexible Body to Flexible Body Adams/View displays the following five options:
I Flex Body
I Region
This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of
specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered,
then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. I
Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by rightclicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node" option.
Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the nodes with
the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse button to finish.
Note:
J Flex Body
A - D 127
Create Run-Time Clearance
Do the following:
This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of
specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered,
then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. J
Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by rightclicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node"
option.Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the
nodes with the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse
button to finish.
Note:
Exclusion Radius
Specifies the radius for excluding connection between the two parts
selected for clearance analysis. The nodes that lie in the specified radius of
any joints connecting the specified I flexible body and the J flexible body
will be excluded from the clearance computation.
128 Adams/View
Create Spec Line
Adds Spec lines to your plots to help you compare curves to a constant baseline value. A spec line can
be a horizontal, vertical, or diagonal line that indicates a value of significance on the vertical axis. You
can start the spec line at any X or Y position.
For example, if you are plotting acceleration and you want to keep the acceleration below a certain value,
you can add a spec line marking that value on the plot. You can then compare any curves that you add to
that plot to see if the curves fall beneath the spec line. There are no limits to the number of spec lines you
can add to a plot.
Do the following:
Enter the name you want to assign to the spec line. The box shows the complete
name of the spec line, including its parents
in the database.
Y Value
X Value
Note:
Color
Line Style
Thickness
A - D 129
Create State Variable for Plant State
Creates state variables for use in a plant state object. The variables that a plant state object can only
contain functions of displacement:
Learn more about plant state objects in the LINERAR command
Learn about plant states with Data Element Create Plant State dialog box help.
Do the following:
From Marker
Along Marker
From Component
Select the component in which you are interested. The components available
depend on the coordinate system.
130 Adams/View
Create a Flexible Body
Imports a flexible body into Adams/Flex. You specify a Modal Neutral File (MNF) or an MD DB file
(.master) and Adams/View creates the necessary Adams/View geometry for displaying the flexible body.
It also creates a mesh on the flexible body representing the flexible body nodes.
By default, Adams/Flex places the flexible body so the flexible bodys local body reference frame
(LBRF) is at the origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite
element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the location and
orientation as you import the body or after it is imported as you do any element in Adams/View.
Do the following:
Select the appropriate option and enter the name of the MNF or the MD
DB file.
or
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
MD DB File Name
Index
Note:
The parameter applies only, when the user is creating a flexible body out
of the MD DB. The parameter specifies the index of the flexible body in
the specified MD DB. The parameter is optional. If not specified, it is
assumed to have the value 1.
Note:
Import All
The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the
displayed list.
A - D 131
Create a Flexible Body
Do the following:
Do one of the following:
Leave use default selected to accept the default nonzero damping
as follows:
1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100.
10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range.
100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000.
Clear the selection of use default, and then enter:
Scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.
Adams run-time function expressions to create complex
Select one:
Off - Disables the generalized damping.
Full - Enables the complete generalized damping matrix,
Orientation
132 Adams/View
Create a Flexible Body
Do the following:
You can:
Specify the orientation coordinates.
Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
FEM Translate
Select to display the MNF XForm dialog box to transform the flexible
body.
Specify the threshold frequency for quasi-static modes. Any mode with
frequency higher than this value will be treated as quasi-static.
Stability Factor
A - D 133
Create a Request
Create a Request
Build Measure REQUEST New
Creates a request. Note that the options for providing result and component names are only available if
the output of the results set is XML format. See Results (.res) Options dialog box help.
Learn more about Requests.
Do the following:
Enter the name that you want assigned to the request in the Modeling
database.
Adams Id
Component Names
Component
Labels/Component Units
134 Adams/View
Create a Request
Do the following:
Specifies the name of the result set in which all result set components
produced by this request are placed when the result file is written in
XML. If there is an existing result set with this name, then the result
set components are placed in that result set. If there isn't an existing
result set, then a new one is created and all the result set components
are placed there.
This is helpful if you want to group the output from multiple requests
into a single result set. For example, you might have several different
requests measuring driver input for a vehicle, and you might want to
place them all within a result set named Driver_Inputs for easier
viewing in Adams/PostProcessor.
Comments
Add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Set to:
Define Using Type & Markers
Define Using
Subroutines/Define Using
Variables
If you selected Define Using Type & Markers, the following options appear:
Output Type
Routine
A - D 135
Create a Request
Do the following:
If you specified to write an output file (.out), enter up to eight headings
for columns of request output. Separate each heading with a comma
(,).
Each heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric characters,
including underscores (_). The first character in each heading must be
alphabetic. You cannot use a comma (,), a semicolon (;), an ampersand
(&), or an exclamation point (!).
If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two
quotation marks (" ") with no characters between them.
If you selected Define Using Function Expressions, the following options appear:
f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8
Title
Enter a title for the top of each set of information output. The entire
comment must be on one line. The title can be only eighty characters
long. You can use blank spaces and all alphanumeric characters.
However, you cannot use the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the
ampersand (&), and the exclamation point (!).
Enter the variables in the text box. Learn about Creating and Modifying
State Variables.
136 Adams/View
Create/Modify Contact
Create/Modify Contact
Build Forces Contact Force Tool
Creates or modifies a contact force between two geometries. Learn About Contact Forces. For solids and
curves, you can select more than one geometry as long as the geometry belongs to the same part. The first
geometry is called the I geometry and the second geometry is called the J geometry. For sphere-to-sphere
contacts, you can specify that the contact be inside or outside the sphere.
Learn more about Contacts.
Do the following:
Contact Type
Set to the type of geometry to come into contact. The text boxes change
depending on the type of contact force you selected.
If you selected Solid to Solid, Adams/View displays the following two options:
I Solid
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.
J Solid
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.
If you selected Curve to Curve, Adams/View displays the following four options:
I Curve
Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same
part.
I Direction(s)
Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool
.
J Curve
Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same
part.
J Direction(s)
Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool
.
If you selected Point to Curve, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Marker
Enter a marker.
Curve
Direction(s)
Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool
.
If you selected Point to Plane, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Marker
Enter a marker.
Plane
Enter a plane.
A - D 137
Create/Modify Contact
Do the following:
If you selected Curve to Plane, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Curve
Direction(s)
Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool
.
Plane
Enter a plane.
If you selected Sphere to Plane, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Sphere
Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool
.
Direction(s)
Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool
.
Plane
Enter a plane.
If you selected Sphere to Sphere, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Sphere
Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool
.
Sphere
Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool
.
If you selected Flex Body to Solid, Adams/View displays the following two options:
I Flexible Body
J Solid
If you selected Flex Body to Flex Body, Adams/View displays the following two options:
I Flexible Body
J Flexible Body
If you selected Flex Edge to Curve, Adams/View displays the following three options:
I Flexible Body
I Flex Edge
J Curve
If you selected Flex Edge to Flex Edge, Adams/View displays the following four options:
I Flexible Body
138 Adams/View
Create/Modify Contact
Do the following:
Select a Flex Edge on I Flexible Body.
To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool
J Flexible Body
J Flex Edge
If you selected Flex Edge to Plane, Adams/View displays the following three options:
I Flexible Body
I Flex Edge
Plane
Select to turn on the force display of both normal and friction forces, and select
a color for the force display.
Note:
Normal Force
If you are using an External Adams/Solver, you must set the output
files to XML to view the force display. See Solver Settings - Output
dialog box help.
Select either:
Restitution - To define the normal force as restitution-based. This
option is not available with Flex Body to Solid and Flex Body to Flex
Body type of contacts.
Impact - To define the normal force based on an impact using the
IMPACT function.
User Defined - To define the force based on a User-written subroutine.
Learn about the types of Contact Force Algorithms and also see Learning More
about the Contact Detection Algorithm.
If you selected Restitution for Normal Force, define the following two options:
A - D 139
Create/Modify Contact
Do the following:
Enter a penalty value to define the local stiffness properties between the
contacting material.
A large penalty value ensures that the penetration of one geometry into another
will be small. Large values, however, will cause numerical integration
difficulties. A value of 1E6 is appropriate for systems modeled in Kg-mm-sec.
For more information on how to specify this value, see the Extended Definition
for the CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online help.
Notes:
Restitution
Coefficient
Enter the coefficient of restitution, which models the energy loss during
contact.
A value of zero specifies a perfectly plastic contact between the two
colliding bodies.
A value of one specifies a perfectly elastic contact. There is no energy
loss.
The coefficient of restitution is a function of the two materials that are coming
into contact. For information on material types versus commonly used values
of the coefficient of restitution, see the table for the CONTACT statement in the
Adams/Solver online help.
If you selected Impact for Normal Force, define the following four options:
140 Adams/View
Create/Modify Contact
Do the following:
Enter a material stiffness that is to be used to calculate the normal force for the
impact model. In general, the higher the stiffness, the more rigid or hard the
bodies in contact are.
Note:
Force Exponent
Damping
Penetration Depth
If you selected User Defined for Normal Force, define the following two options:
User function
Routine
Select to refine the normal force between two sets of rigid geometries that are
in contact. When you select Augmented Lagrangian, Adams/View uses
iterative refinement to ensure that penetration between the geometries is
minimal. It also ensures that the normal force magnitude is relatively
insensitive to the penalty or stiffness used to model the local material
compliance effects.
Note:
A - D 141
Create/Modify Contact
Do the following:
Select to model the friction effects at the contact locations using the Coulomb
friction model, no friction, or as user-defined subroutine. The Coulomb friction
model models dynamic friction but not stiction in contacts.
For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In
addition, read the information for the CONTACT statement in the
Adams/Solver online help.
If you selected Coulomb for Friction Force, define the following four options:
Coulomb Friction
Static Coefficient
Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is
smaller than the value for Static Transition Vel. For information on material
types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of static friction, see
Material Contact Properties Table.
Excessively large values of Static Coefficient can cause integration difficulties.
Range: Static Coefficient
Dynamic Coefficient Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is
larger than the value for Friction Transition Vel.
For information on material types versus commonly used values of the
coefficientof the dynamic coefficient of friction, see Material Contact
Properties Table.
Excessively large values of Dynamic Coefficient can cause integration
difficulties.
Range: 0
Dynamic Coefficient
Static Coefficient
142 Adams/View
Create/Modify Contact
Do the following:
( Vs ) = s
( Vs ) = s
(0) = 0
( Vd ) = d
( Vd ) = d
( V ) = sign ( V ) d
for ( V > V d )
( V ) = step ( V , V d, d, V s, s ) sign ( V )
( V ) = step ( V, V s, s, V s, s )
A - D 143
Create/Modify Contact
Do the following:
Small values for this option cause the integrator difficulties. You
should specify this value as:
5* ERROR
If you selected User Defined for Friction Force, define the following two options:
User function
Routine
144 Adams/View
Create/Modify Contact Arrays
Do the following:
Stiffness Force
Force Exponent
Damping Maximum
Penetration Depth
Dynamic Friction Coefficient (k) Enter the proportion of normal force applied in the opposite
direction of relative motion, from slip velocity to dynamic
transition velocity.
Dynamic Friction Transition
Velocity (Vk)
A - D 145
Create/Modify Design Variable
146 Adams/View
Create/Modify Design Variable
Do the following:
Name
Type
If you selected the type Real or Integer, the following four options appear:
Standard Value
Value Range by
Set the one of the following and enter the limits in the Min/Max or +/- Delta
text boxes:
Absolute Min and Max Values - Specifies a value range (an
standard value.
+/- Percent Relative to Value - Specifies percentage increments
Enter the lower limit for the range or the relative amount or percentage
below the standard value.
+ Delta/Max Value
Enter the upper limit for the range or the relative amount or percentage
above the standard value.
Allow Optimization to
ignore range
If you want to allow an optimization to use any value for the variable, select
Allow Optimization to ignore range.
Selecting Allow Optimization to ignore range does not disable the range for
a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE). The range is used for a
design study or DOE only if a list of values has not been specified or is to
be ignored.
A - D 147
Create/Modify Design Variable
Do the following:
If you want to specify a list of values, select List of allowed values and
enter the values in the text box that appears. This lets you to use unequally
spaced values or always use the same set of values. By default, the list of
values takes precedence over the range in a design study or DOE.
Note:
The Value Range setting also affects the allowed values you
enter. For example, if you have selected a Value Range of
percent relative, then Adams/View interprets your entered
allowed values as percentages relative to the standard value.
If you selected List of allowed values, the following two options appear:
Generate
To keep the list of values and still use the range for a design study and
DOE, select Allow Design Study to ignore list. By selecting Allow Design
Study to ignore list, you can switch back and forth between using the range
and the list of values without re-entering the list each time.
Enter the database object for the design variable (for example,
.model_1.part_1). For more on objects and their database name, see Getting
Object Names and Data Dictionary in the Adams/View Function Builder
online help.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Note:
Now that you have created a design variable, youll need to reference it in your model. You
can enter the design variable directly, using the Reference Design Variable command, or
you can type it into a text box. You can also use the Function Builder to create a more
complex expression using the design variable. When you reference your design variable,
Adams/View places parentheses () around the variable because you are creating a simple
expression that references the value of the design variable.
148 Adams/View
Create/Modify Differential Equation
Do the following:
Type
Definition
Set to either:
Run-time Expression to enter a function expression that
Adams/Solver evaluates during a Simulation. In the function
equation.
y' =
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine DIFSUB.
Learn about ROUTINE Argument.
to
A - D 149
Create/Modify Differential Equation
Do the following:
Specify:
The initial value of the differential equation at the start of the
simulation.
Optionally, if you are defining an implicit equation, an approximate
Select whether or not Adams/Solver should hold constant the value of the
differential equation during Static equilibrium and Quasi-static simulations.
Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
150 Adams/View
Create/modify an External System
system in the model, is selected for modification (by right clicking the body and choosing the
'Modify' option) then the same dialog opens in 'Modify' mode. In the Modify mode, the fields on
the dialog will be pre-populated with the values of the external system being modified.
Note:
By default, the external system is placed so its local body reference frame (LBRF) is at the
origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite
element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the
location and orientation as you import the body or after it is imported as you do any element
in Adams/View. This is applicable only for external systems that have a visual
representation.
Do the following:
type
The type of external system. Select one from the following options,
1. Nastran
2. User
The default option when the dialog is opened in the Create mode is
Nastran.
input_file_name
File containing the input source parameters for the external system. The
button provided on the side of the field
edit the specified file.
index_in_database
Index of the body in the specified MD DB. Valid only if the parameter
md_db_file_name is specified.
A - D 151
Create/modify an External System
Do the following:
You may optionally specify a modal neutral file (MNF) or an MD DB file (.master) and
Adams/View creates the necessary Adams/View geometry for displaying the external
system. It also creates a mesh on the external system representing the external system nodes.
The external system will have a visual representation only if either of MNF/MD DB is
specified.
user_function
interface_routines
Location
Orientation
Relative to
You can:
152 Adams/View
Create/Modify Filter Function
Creates or modifies a curve filter to eliminate noise on time signals or to emphasize a specific frequency
content of a time signal. Adams/PostProcessor supports two different types of filters:
Butterworth filter - butter() in MATLAB developed by The MathWorks, Inc.
Transfer function - A filter you define by directly specifying the coefficients of a transfer
function.
Once you create a filter, you can apply it to any curve.
Learn about Filtering Curve Data.
Do the following:
Filter Name
Defined by
Filter Type
frequencies.
Order
Set how much the filter will have damped the signal at the cutoff frequency,
often referred to as how sharp the filter is.
First-order filter damps 3dB at the cutoff frequency.
Second-order damps 6dB.
Third-order damps 9dB.
A - D 153
Create/Modify Filter Function
Do the following:
Set the frequency of cutoff.
For a digital filter - Determines the cutoff frequency as a ratio of the
(rad/s or Hz). If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop for Filter Type,
you must provide two cutoff frequencies.
If you selected Transfer Function, Adams/PostProcessor displays the following options:
Analog/Digital
Create from
Butterworth Filter
Select to display the Create Butterworth Filter dialog box to define the transfer
function coefficients based on a Butterworth filter.
154 Adams/View
Create/Modify Filter Function
Do the following:
Numerator/Denominat Specify the coefficients for the transfer function that define the filter.
or Coefficients
For an analog filter, the transfer function is defined by the continuous
Laplace s polynomial.
For a digital filter, the transfer function is defined in the z-plane.
This differs from how a transfer function is defined for Adams/Solver, where
the coefficients are given in increasing order:
switch between the filters gain and phase plots and change scales.
A - D 155
Create/Modify Friction
Create/Modify Friction
Right-click joint Modify Friction tool
Models both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical,
hooke/universal, and spherical joints. You cannot apply friction to joints connected to Flexible bodies or
Point masses.
For more information on the values to be entered in the dialog box, select a type of joint below:
Revolute Joint Options
Cylindrical Joint Options
Translational Joint Options
Spherical Joint Options
Universal/Hooke Joint Options
Learn about:
Friction Regime Determination (FRD)
156 Adams/View
Create/Modify General Constraint
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name for the general constraint. If you are creating a
general constraint, Adams/View assigns a default name to it.
f(q)=
You cannot enter the Adams ID for the marker; you must
enter the name of the marker. Learn about Adams/Solver
IDs.
Add any comments about the general constraint that you want to
enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.
A - D 157
Create/Modify General State Equation
Lets you represent a subsystem that has well defined inputs (u), internal states (x), and a set of well
defined outputs (y).
Learn about:
Creating and Modifying General State Equations
System Elements
Do the following:
Solver ID
U Array (Inputs)
Specify the array element that defines the input variables for the GSE.
The U array is optional. When not specified, there are no system
inputs. The number of inputs to the GSE is inferred from the number
of variables in the U array.
Y Array (Outputs)
Specify the array element that defines the output variables for the
GSE.
If you specify a user function, enter function names to use other than
the standard names GSE_DERIV, GSE_UPDATE, and
GSE_OUTPUT.
States
Set to:
Continuous
Discrete
Sampled
None (No options appear)
158 Adams/View
Create/Modify General State Equation
Do the following:
X Array (Continous)
Enter the array element that defines the continuous states for the GSE.
The array element must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any
other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array (Continous)
Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the
continuous states in the system.
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the continuous
states are initialized to zero.
Static Hold
Enter the array element that is used to access the discrete states for the
GSE. It must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array (Discrete)
Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the
discrete states in the system. The array is optional. The array element
must be of the IC type.
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the discrete states
are initialized to zero.
Specify the Simulation time at which the sampling of the discrete states
is to start. All discrete states before the first sample time are defined to
be at the initial condition specified. The default is zero.
Sample Function/Sample
User Parameters
A - D 159
Create/Modify Material
Create/Modify Material
Build Materials
Do the following:
Name
If desired, change the default name assigned to the new material type.
Youngs Modulus
Poissons Ratio
Density
160 Adams/View
Create/Modify Matrix
Create/Modify Matrix
Build Data Elements Matrix New/Modify
Note:
You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams/View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file.
Do the following:
Units
Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select
no_units if you do not want units associated with the values. If you set the
units for your matrix values, Adams/View automatically performs any
necessary unit conversions if you ever change your default modeling units.
Comments
Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify the
array. See Comments.
Full Matrix/
Set to:
Sparse Matrix/
From a File
Full Matrix
Sparse Matrix
From a File
Set to either:
Enter Input Ordered by Columns - Specify that matrix values are
A - D 161
Create/Modify Matrix
Do the following:
Row Count
For user-entered numbers only, enter the number of rows in the matrix.
Column Count
For user-entered numbers only, enter the number of columns in the matrix.
Values
Enter the values in the matrix in either row or column order depending on
the order you selected above. You can separate the values using a comma or
by pressing Enter after each value.
For result set components only, enter the names of the components.
Column Index
Values
Enter the nonzero values in your matrix starting with the first column.
Separate each value with a comma.
Enter the name of the file containing the matrix values and the name of the
matrix in the file. The name of the matrix is necessary even if the file
contains only one matrix. You will need to create additional matrices to read
other matrices from the same file.
Learn About the Format for Matrix Data Files.
162 Adams/View
Create/Modify Modal Force
Do the following:
Force Name
Flexible Body
Reaction Part
If desired, in the text box, enter the name of an existing part to which to apply the
reaction of the modal force resultant. If you enter a part name, Adams/View
automatically creates a Floating marker associated with this part when it creates
the MFORCE. Adams/View keeps the marker coincident with the flexible body
analysis coordinate system during the simulation. Therefore, the need for the
point of reaction to be a floating marker.
In addition, because floating markers cannot be defined on flexible bodies, the
reaction part is restricted to rigid bodies only. You can use the Info command to
see the floating marker that Adams/View creates when you reference a reaction
part.
A - D 163
Create/Modify Modal Force
Do the following:
Select how you want to define the modal force:
Function - Lets you select the modal loadcase and scale function of the
modal load case and scale function whose product is the modal force
applied to the flexible body. The scale function can depend on time or the
state of the system. The load case can only be a function of time.
Force - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be passed
to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the modal
force on the flexible body. Each component of the modal force can
depend on time or the state of the system. (Adams/Solver (C++) only.
Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog
box help.)
To use a subroutine, you need to build a version of the Adams/Solver that
contains your version of the MFOSUB routine that quantifies the modal force.
For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online
help. You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine
in the Routine text box. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE
Argument.
If you selected to specify a flexible body with modal load case information, you also specify the
following two options:
Load Case
Select a modal load case label from a list. The list of modal loadcase labels is
generated from the MNF. Learn about Creating Loadcase Files.
Scale Function
Specify an expression for the scale factor to be applied to the modal load case.
164 Adams/View
Create/Modify Point Mass
Point masses are points that have mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities. They are
computationally more efficient when rotational effects are not important.
For example, you could use point masses to represent the concentrated masses in a net. You could then
represent the ropes between the masses as forces or springs.
Do the following:
Name
If you are creating a point mass, enter a name for the point mass.
Mass
Location
Select to enter comments to help you manage and identify the point mass. See
Comments.
If you are modifying a point mass, the following also appear:
Displays the Precision Move dialog box to let you change the position of the
point mass.
Displays the Point Mass Measure dialog box to let you create a measure for the
point mass. Learn about creating Object Measures.
Position ICs/
Velocity ICs
Displays the Modify Body dialog box set to let you change the initial position or
velocity of the point mass.
A - D 165
Create/Modify Road
Create/Modify Road
Adds a road assembly to your model. If your model includes tires, you must specify a road because each
tire must reference a road. The road determines the surface friction, bumps, and other inputs to tires.
Do the following:
Name
Part
Enter a part, typically the ground part, to which the road belongs. Generally the
road is fixed in ground but in some cases, the road may move (for example, a
military vehicle driving on the deck of a warship).
Property File
Enter the name of a road property file. The road property file determines the kind
or road (smooth or rough, wet or dry). You can view the contents of the road
property file using the View File button
.
Graphics
Select On to display road graphics or select Off to hide any road graphics. You may
want to hide the road graphics when you work on your model. Roads graphics are
typically large and can affect operations such as fitting to view.
Enter a location for the road. The location determines the origin of the road and,
along with the road property file, determines whether any tires referencing this
road are initially contacting the road.
Orient Using
Select a method to orient the road, either Euler Angles or Direction Vectors. The
z direction of the road orientation is always vertical direction. Therefore, you
should orient this axis of the road so it matches the vertical direction in your model.
If you selected Direction Vectors, the following two options become available:
X Vector/
Z Vector
Enter the x- and z-direction vectors to orient the road. The x-, y-, and z-axes of the
road are determine from the direction vectors as follows:
Z = z-vector / | z-vector |
Y = z-vector x x-vector / | z vector x x-vector |
X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |
166 Adams/View
Create/Modify Road
Do the following:
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Select to display the contents of the road property file in the Information window.
This helps you determine what kind of road the file models.
A - D 167
Create/Modify Sensor
Create/Modify Sensor
Simulate Sensor New
Right-click sensor Modify
Allows you to add a sensor to your model or modify an existing one. A sensor monitors a Simulation for
a specified event and changes a set of simulation controls when the event occurs.
Learn about:
Adding Sensors to Your Model
SENSOR statement in the Adams/Solver online help
Do the following:
Name
Event Definition
Choose either:
Run-Time Expression - Defines the triggering event using a run-time
function expression.
User-Written Subroutine - Defines the triggering event using a
subroutine.
If you selected Run-Time Expression, the following two options are available:
Expression
168 Adams/View
Create/Modify Sensor
Do the following:
Choose either:
Run-Time Expression - Specifies an expression that is evaluated
If you selected Run-Time Expression, the following two options are available:
Expression
Angular Values
A - D 169
Create/Modify Sensor
Do the following:
Select one of the following:
Equal - From (Target - Error) to (Target + Error).
Greater than or equal - Greater than or equal to (Target - Error).
Less than or equal - Less than or equal to (Target + Error).
In the figure, the sensor triggers whenever the value of the function being
monitored is in the shaded areas. Be careful that your function does not
evaluate in the shaded area at the start of your simulation unless you want your
sensor to trigger immediately. It is a good idea to define a function measure
using the same expression used for your sensor so you can check it by plotting
it.
Value
End Tolerance
Enter the absolute value of allowable error between the targeted value and the
actual sensed value.
Generate additional
Output Step at event
Select to create an extra Output step when Adams/Solver triggers the sensor so
you can capture the action.
170 Adams/View
Create/Modify Sensor
Do the following:
Terminate current
simulation
and...[stop, or
continue with a
simulation script]
Select to:
Set Integration
Stepsize
Select to redefine the next integration step size. This change is temporary and
lasts only for the next solution step.
Select to restart integration and reduce the integration order to one. If you also
set integration step size as explained above, Adams/Solver reinitializes the
integration step size to the specified value. If you do not specify the step size,
Adams/Solver reinitializes the integration step size to the integrator's default
step size.
To define integration order, see Solver Settings - Dynamic.
Refactorize Jacobian
Select to write the entire array of state variable values to a text file in your
current working directory.
Select to add any comments about the sensor to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Only available for Run-Time Expression.
Create two measures to monitor the expression and state of a sensor during
simulation. Learn about Object Measures.
A - D 171
Create/Modify Simulation Script
Do the following:
Script
Script Type
Select either:
Simple Run
Adams/View Commands
Adams/Solver Commands
Enter the time interval over which the Simulation takes place and set how
you want it defined. You can select:
End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want
simulation to run.
Steps/Step Size
Set the frequency with which Adams/View outputs data during your
simulation. You can specify:
Steps - Represents the total number of times you want
172 Adams/View
Create/Modify Simulation Script
Do the following:
Select a type of simulation to run:
Transient - Default
Transient - Dynamic
Transient - Kinematic
Transient - Static
A - D 173
Create/Modify Solver Array
Do the following:
Enter the name that you want assigned to the array.
Tips: You might find it easier to track which array element goes with
which system element if you name the array elements and the
corresponding system elements with like names. For example, the
states (X) array that goes with general state equation GSE_100 would
be ARRAY_100 ; the inputs (U) array would be ARRAY_101 ; and
the outputs (Y) array would be ARRAY_102 .
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify
the array. See Comments.
General/Initial Conditions
(ICs)/
Set to:
General
X (States)/
Y (Outputs)/
X (States)
U (Inputs)
Y (Outputs)
U (Inputs)
174 Adams/View
Create/Modify Spline
Create/Modify Spline
Build Data Element Spline New/Modify
The Spline Editor provides a tabular or plot view of your spline data for editing and plotting. You can
drag points on your spline plots and see the effect of different curve-fitting techniques on your spline.
You can also select linear extrapolation and view its effect.
Using the Spline Editor, you can create a two- or three-dimensional splines. Note, however, that the
Spline Editor does not display a three-dimensional spline in plot view.
Learn about Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor.
To set the view of the Spline Editor:
Set View As to either Tabular Data or Plot.
A - D 175
Create/Modify Standard Controls Block
Displays the Adams/View Controls toolkit, which provides basic control elements such as filters, gains,
and PIDs.
Adams/View implements these controllers within the model as differential equations (that is, linear
continuous control). You can modify the user-defined control inputs and outputs for later use with
Adams/Linear and Adams/Controls.
Learn more about Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.
176 Adams/View
Create/Modify Standard Controls Block
Icon
Link
Input-Signal Function Block
Gain Block
Integrator Block
PID Controller
Switch Block
A - D 177
Create/Modify State Variable
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the state variable.
Definition
Set to either:
Run-time Expression
User written subroutine
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine VARSUB.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Guess for F(1, 0..) and Select and then specify an approximate initial value for the variable, if
desired. Adams/Solver may adjust the value when it performs an Initial
conditions simulation. Entering an accurate value for initial conditions can
help Adams/Solver converge to the initial conditions solution.
178 Adams/View
Create/Modify String
Create/Modify String
Build Data Elements String New/Modify
Creates or modifies a string element that defines a character string that you can refer to later in the
execution of Adams/View or Adams/Solver. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the
next line. It can, however, be longer than a single line. You can use the GTSTRG subroutine to retrieve
the character string in a User-written subroutine. For example, you could use a string element to pass a
file name to a user-written subroutine. For more information, see Subroutines section of the
Adams/Solver online help.
Do the following:
String
A - D 179
Create/Modify Transfer Function
Do the following:
Enter the name that you want assigned to the transfer function.
Enter the array that defines the input (or control) for the transfer function. The
array must be an inputs (U) array. If you specified the size of the array when
you created it, it must be one.
Enter the array that defines the state variable array for the transfer function.
The array must be a states (X) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specified the
size of the array when you created it, it must be one less than the number of
coefficients in the denominator.
Enter the array that defines the output for the transfer function. The array must
be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state
equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specify the size
of the array when you created it, its size must be one.
Enter the array that defines the initial conditions array for the transfer
function. The array must be an IC array, and it cannot be used in any other
linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you
specified the size of the array when you created it, it must be equal to the size
of the state array.
Numerator Coefficients
and Denominator
Coefficients
180 Adams/View
Create/Modify Transfer Function
Do the following:
Select whether or not Adams/Solver should hold constant the value of the
transfer equation during static and Quasi-static simulations. Learn about
Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
Select to enter comments about the transfer function to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
A - D 181
Create/Modify Wheel and Tire
Do the following:
Name
Side (left,right)
Select the side of the vehicle on which this wheel-tire assembly will
be located. Some road use this information to apply different inputs
to left and right tires (for example, the 2D stochastic (random) road).
If you are modeling a motorcycle, we recommend selecting left for
both the front and rear wheel tires.
CM Offset
Optionally, enter the wheel center of mass offset. This is the distance
the wheel center of mass is offset along the wheel-spin (z) axis from
the wheel center.
Mass
Enter the mass of wheel. Typically, the mass of the wheel and tire are
lumped together. If you select a property file for the SWIFT or FTIRE
models, however, enter only the mass of the wheel itself as these
models include the mass affects of the tire.
Ixx Iyy
Enter the moment of inertia about the x- and y-axes (camber and steer
axes). Enter one value because Ixx is assumed to equal Iyy for wheeltire.
Izz
Enter the offset of the wheel center geometry along the z-axis of the
wheel part.
Specify the property file containing the data for the tire. When the
dialog box is first displayed, the default filename mdi_0001.tir
appears in the text box. Use the View File button
to view the
contents of the tire property file.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Longitudinal Velocity
(Optional)
Enter the initial longitudinal velocity of the wheel-tire. The
longitudinal velocity is velocity along the X axis of the wheel-tire.
182 Adams/View
Create/Modify Wheel and Tire
Do the following:
(Optional)
Enter the initial spin velocity of the wheel-tire. The spin velocity is
the rotational velocity of the wheel-tire about its z-axis in negative
direction. A good approximation of the initial spin velocity is the
longitudinal velocity divided by the unloaded radius of the tire:
Spin Velocity = Longitudinal Velocity / Unloaded Radius
Road
Orient using
Euler Angles
Enter the euler angles (body 3,1,3 angles) to orient the wheel-tire
assembly.
X Vector
vector |
X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |
A - D 183
Create/Modify model
Create/Modify model
Build Model New/Modify
Creates or modifies a Model. You can store more than one model in a Modeling database. You may find
it helpful to store multiple models in the same database because it lets you:
Keep multiple versions of the same mechanical system in the same file.
Store models of subsystems in one file that you want to combine and simulate as a whole.
Compare results between models.
Do the following:
Model Name
184 Adams/View
Custom Inertial Modeling
Use to select the inertia invariants to define the modal formulation of the flexible body. Use the Tool tips
to help you decide which invariants to select. Learn more about defining the modal formulation.
A - D 185
Cut Tool
Cut Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Cut Tool
Removes the volume where one solid intersects another solid to create a new solid. It subtracts the
geometry of the second part that you select from the geometry of the first part. The remaining geometry
belongs to the second part that you selected. The following is an example of cutting a solid:
You cannot cut the geometry so that the remaining geometry is split into two solids. For example, you
cannot cut a block from the center of a cylinder so that two cylinders remain after the cut. The following
is an example of cutting a solid into two solids:
186 Adams/View
Cut Tool
If a part completely envelopes another part, you cannot cut that part from the enveloped part because no
geometry would result. For example, if a box completely envelopes a sphere, you cannot cut the box from
the sphere and leave a zero mass part. The following is an example of cutting a solid into a zero-mass part
A - D 187
Cylinder Tool
Cylinder Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Cylinder Tool
Creates a Solid geometry with a circular base. You draw the cylinders centerline and Adams/View
creates the cylinder with a radius 25% of the length of the centerline. Before you draw a cylinder, you
can also specify its length and radius:
The Cylinder tool draws the centerline of the cylinder in the plane of the screen or the Working grid, if
you have it turned on.
Learn about Creating a Cylinder.
For the option:
New Part/Add to
Part/On Ground
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the cylinder to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the cylinder to ground.
Tip:
Length
Radius
Note:
Two hotpoints appear after you draw a cylinder. One lets you modify the length of the
cylinder and one lets you set its radius. For more information on modifying geometry using
hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
188 Adams/View
Cylindrical Joint Tool
Creates a cylindrical joint that allows both relative rotation as well as relative translation of one part with
respect to another part. A cylindrical joint can be located anywhere along the axis about which the parts
can rotate or slide with respect to each other.
The orientation of the cylindrical joint defines the direction of the axis about which the parts can rotate
or slide along with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the cylindrical joint is parallel to the
orientation vector and passes through the location.
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
A - D 189
Cylindrical Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
Learn about Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Feature
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a
190 Adams/View
Data Element Create Array U Input Array
Groups together a set of variables to define the inputs for a system element, either linear state equation,
general state equation, or transfer function.
Learn about Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.
Do the following:
Array Name
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify it. See
Comments.
Size
Variable Name
A - D 191
Data Element Create Array X State Array
Defines a list of state variables (X) associated with a system element, such as a linear state equation,
general state equation, or transfer function. To use this array, you must reference the array name as the
state variable array in the system element definition. You can use each X state array with only one system
element in your model.
Do the following:
Array Name
Adams ID
Comments
Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify it. See
Comments.
Size
Specify the size of the array. The corresponding system element automatically
determines the size of the array and checks it against the size you entered.
For linear state equation, the X state array size is the row dimension of the
A state matrix.
For transfer functions, the transformation from polynomial ratio type to
canonical state space type internally determines the X state array size.
For general state equations, the X state array size is the state equation
192 Adams/View
Data Element Create Array Y Output Array
Specifies the output array for a system element, either linear state equation, general state equation, or
transfer function. To use these arrays, you must reference the array name as the output array in the system
element definition. You can use each Y output array with only a single system element.
Learn about Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.
For the option:
Do the following:
Array Name
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify the array. See
Comments.
Size
Specify the size of the array. The corresponding system's modeling element
automatically determines the size of the array and checks it against the size you
entered.
For linear state equations, the Y output array size is the row dimension of
A - D 193
Data Element Create Curve
Do the following:
Curve Name
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the curve to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Closed
Set to either:
Interpolation Order
Specify the order of the b-spline interpolating the curve. The order is
1 plus the degree of the functions used to define the spline. The order
also affects the number of points used to determine each spline
segment. For example, splines of order 2 are basically polylines, while
the segments used to create an spline of order 4 are of the 3rd order. 4
is the default order of splines, which is a cubic b-sline.
Note:
Minimum Parameter
194 Adams/View
Data Element Create Curve
Do the following:
Maximum Parameter
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the subroutine. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
A - D 195
Data Element Create Plant Input
Defines a set of inputs (state variables) to the mechanical system that Adams/Solver recognizes as system
input during an Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant input acts
only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant input:
Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function PINVAL(i i), where i
specifies the PINPUT ID and i specifies the ith variable in the plant input list. Note that i is not
the ID of the variable.
User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input
list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines
section of the Adams/Solver online help).
Learn more:
Plant Inputs and Outputs
Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Note:
Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Do the following:
Enter the name that you want assigned to the plant input.
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the plant input to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Variable Name
196 Adams/View
Data Element Create Plant Output
Defines a set of output (state variables) that Adams/Solver recognizes as system output during an
Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant output acts only as a
pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant output:
Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function POUVAL(i1,i2),
where i1 specifies the plant output ID, and i2 specifies the i2th variable in the plant output list.
Note that i2 is not the ID of the variable.
User-written subroutines access single elements of the plant output list and call the subroutine
SYSFNC to access all values for a POUTPUT by calling the subroutine SYSARY (see the
Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help).
Note:
Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Learn more:
Plant Inputs and Outputs
Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Do the following:
Enter the name that you want assigned to the plant output.
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the plant output to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Variable Name
A - D 197
Data Element Create Plant State
Adams/Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.
Adams/Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which
eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used
to linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of
states are provided, then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the
ones that were not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams/Solver identifies and
discards the redundant states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be
used in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can
instruct Adams/Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can
contain any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
For more information, see the Adams/Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article
KB8016460.
For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.
Do the following:
Enter the name that you want assigned to the plant state.
Assign a unique ID number to the plant state. See Adams/Solver
ID.
Comments
Add any comments about the plant state to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Variable Name
Create State Variable for Plant State Displays the Create State Variable for Plant State dialog box,
which allows you to create state variables for use in a plant state
object.
198 Adams/View
Data Element Create Spline
Do the following:
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the spline to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Linear Extrapolate
Units
Enter the units that you want assigned for values in your spline.
File/Result Set
Component/Numerical
Set to:
File
Result Set Component
Numerical
Block Name
If desired, enter the block within the file from which you want
Adams/View to take the data. The block must be specifically named in
the file.
Channel
Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with
time response data in RPC III files only. For more information, see
Adams/Durability online help.
A - D 199
Data Element Create Spline
Do the following:
Enter the x, y, and, optionally, z values in the text boxes.
Specify at least four x and y values. The maximum number of x
expressions.
Values must be in increasing order: x1 < x2 < x3 , and so on.
Enter the Result set components to be used for the x, y, and z values in
the text boxes.
200 Adams/View
Data Element Modify Curve
Do the following:
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the curve to help you manage and identify it. See
Comments.
Closed
Set to either:
Define Using Matrix
Define Using Subroutine
Interpolation Order
Specify the order of the b-spline interpolating the curve. The order is 1 plus the
degree of the functions used to define the spline. The order also affects the
number of points used to determine each spline segment. For example, splines
of order 2 are basically polylines, while the segments used to create an spline
of order 4 are of the 3rd order. 4 is the default order of splines, which is a cubic
b-sline.
Note:
Minimum Parameter
Enter the minimum value of the curve parameter for a user-written curve.
Maximum Parameter
Enter the maximum value of the curve parameter for a user-written curve.
Routine
A - D 201
Data Element Modify Plant Input
Modifies a set of inputs (state variables) to the mechanical system that Adams/Solver recognizes as
system input during an Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant
input acts only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant input:
Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function PINVAL(i i), where i
specifies the PINPUT ID and i specifies the ith variable in the plant input list. Note that i is not
the ID of the variable.
User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input
list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines
section of the Adams/Solver online help).
Learn more:
Plant Inputs and Outputs
Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Note:
Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Do the following:
Enter the new name that you want assigned to the plant input.
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the plant input to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Variable Name
202 Adams/View
Data Element Modify Plant Output
Modifies a set of output (state variables) that Adams/Solver recognizes as system output during an
Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant output acts only as a
pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant output:
Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function POUVAL(i1,i2),
where i1 specifies the plant output ID, and i2 specifies the i2th variable in the plant output list.
Note that i2 is not the ID of the variable.
User-written subroutines access single elements of the plant output list and call the subroutine
SYSFNC to access all values for a POUTPUT by calling the subroutine SYSARY (see the
Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help).
Note:
Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Learn more:
Plant Inputs and Outputs
Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Do the following:
Select an exisitng plant output.
New Plant Output Name Enter the new name that you want assigned to the plant output.
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the plant output to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Variable Name
A - D 203
Data Element Modify Plant State
Adams/Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.
Adams/Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which
eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used
to linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of
states are provided, then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the
ones that were not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams/Solver identifies and
discards the redundant states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be
used in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can
instruct Adams/Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can
contain any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
For more information, see the Adams/Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article
KB8016460.
For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.
Do the following:
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the plant state to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Variable Name
Create State Variable for Plant State Displays the Create State Variable for Plant State dialog box,
which allows you to create state variables for use in a plant state
object.
204 Adams/View
Data Element Modify Spline
Modifies a spline created using the general method and a file as input.
Learn more about creating and modifying data element Splines.
Do the following:
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the spline to help you manage and identify it. See
Comments.
Linear Extrapolate
Set to yes to extrapolate a spline by applying a linear function over the first
or last two data points. By default, for user-defined files, Adams/Solver
extrapolates a spline that exceeds a defined range by applying a parabolic
function over the first or last three data points. For RPC III or DAC files,
the default method of extrapolation is zero-order (constant).
Learn about Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams/View.
Units
Enter the units that you want assigned for values in your spline.
File/Result Set
Component/Numerical
Set to:
File
Result Set Component
Numerical
Block Name
If desired, enter the block within the file from which you want Adams/View
to take the data. The block must be specifically named in the file.
Channel
Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with time
response data in RPC III files only. For more information, see
Adams/Durability online help.
A - D 205
Data Element Modify Spline
Do the following:
Enter the x, y, and, optionally, z values in the text boxes.
Specify at least four x and y values. The maximum number of x
expressions.
Values must be in increasing order:
Enter the Result set components to be used for the x, y, and z values in the
text boxes.
206 Adams/View
Database Navigator
Database Navigator
Tools Database Navigator
Displays the types of objects appropriate for the command you are executing and shows objects in their
database hierarchy. You can browse for objects or set it to rename objects, view information about the
objects and view dependencies. You can also set a filter for the types of objects displayed in the Database
Navigator.
Learn more about Database Navigator.
Do the following:
Pull-Down Menu Use the pull-down menu to choose a mode option. Select one:
Browse (the default; the options on this page describe Browse)
Display Attribute
Rename
Comments
Information
Topology By Parts
Topology By Connections
Graphical Topology
Associativity
Select List
Filter
Select if you want to filter the types and names that you want displayed in the
Database Navigator. Then, enter the name of the objects you want to display in the
text box and use the pull-down menu to the right to select the type of object(s) you
want to display. You can also use the pull-down menu below the Filter text box to
only display those objects that are active or inactive.
Sort by
Use the pull-down menu to choose how you want the objects sorted. You can also
select to not sort the objects so they appear in the order they are stored in the
modeling database.
Highlight
Off by default. Select if you want an object to appear selected in the main window
and the reverse.
Use the plus sign (+) or the minus (-) (--) signs to display or hide all of the children
hidden/shown in the tree view.
A - D 207
Database Storage
Database Storage
Settings Solver Output More Output Category Database Storage
Selecting Database Storage as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set how
Adams/View handles the results for:
Single Simulations - As you perform a single Simulation, ADAM/View stores the results of the
simulation under the current model in your Modeling database. By default, when you perform
another simulation, Adams/View overwrites the results of the previous simulation. You can store
simulations results in your database after a simulation has finished so that Adams/View does not
overwrite them. For information on saving the results of individual simulation, see Saving
Simulation Results.
Multi-run Simulations - For a parametric analysis, Adams/View stores the parametric analysis
(multi-run) results in an analysis object called Last_Multi. This analysis is not a full analysisit
simply contains a summary of the design variable variations and Objective values for each
model that was analyzed in the parametric study. Unless you rename or copy Last_Multi before
running another parametric analysis, subsequent parametric study summaries will overwrite
Last_Multi.
Saving Multi-Run simulations does not save each individual trial resulit simply saves a summary
of the parametric study. To save each individual trial result, use Save Analysis for Individual
Simulations.
Parametric analyses can run many simulations. Use care in saving individual analyses and/or
mult-run analyses. It is possible to exhaust the memory or file space available on your computer.
Running out of memory or file space can lead to unpredictable system problems, and cause the
parametric analysis to fail.
You can use measures to compare specific data between runs without saving all the results.
Create and display a measure for the data of interest, then select Save Curves under the Display
settings of the Solver Settings dialog box. Adams/View charts the measure for each simulation
and saves all the curves. At the end, you have a strip chart showing the measure for all
simulations.
Stored simulation results remain in your modeling database when you save your modeling database. Be
careful not to save more simulation results than you need since they require quite a bit of storage space.
To delete simulation results from your modeling database, see Deleting Simulation Results.
Do the following:
Single Simulations
Save Analysis
Prefix
After selecting Save Analysis, enter the prefix you want Adams/View to use as the
name of each simulation. Adams/View appends a unique number to the prefix to
form the complete name of the new analysis object.
Multi-Run Simulations
208 Adams/View
Database Storage
Do the following:
Save Analysis
Prefix
After selecting Save Analysis, enter the name you want to use for each analysis
object. Adams/View appends a unique number to the prefix to form the complete
name of the new analysis object. Adams/View creates the new analysis under the
model you analyzed.
Stop on error
A - D 209
Defaults Names
Defaults Names
Settings Names
Allows you to determine whether Adams/View uses full object names, short object names, or
Adams/Solver IDs when displaying run-time functions or object names in the Information Window and
dialog boxes. This also determines the naming the Function Builder Assist box uses for object names or
Adams/Solver IDs to generate run-time functions.
Do the following:
Choose from the following:
Full Names - The object's full name. For example:
DX(Model_1.Part_2.Mar_15).
Short Names - Only the specific portion of the object's name required to
(.adm) file. Example: DX(15). If you select Adams IDs, then Adams/View
displays short names for cases that do not involve functions (object names in
dialog box text boxes).
Note:
Regardless of the option you choose, you can enter the object's full or short name or its
Adams/Solver ID while writing functions.
210 Adams/View
Delete Group
Delete Group
Build Ungroup
Do the following:
Enter the name of the group of objects you want to ungroup.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
A - D 211
Design Evaluation Results Table
Allows you to create a report of the results of the Parametric analyses in a table. Learn more about
Generating a Table.
Do the following:
Result Set
Column Width
Precision
Format
File Name
Enter the file name if you want to write the table to a file.
Display in
Information Window
212 Adams/View
Design Evaluation Tools
Do the following:
Model
Simulation Script
Study a
Select either Measure or Objective to define the type of objective you are
using.
If you selected Measure, select Last, Minimum, Maximum, or
Average from the pull-down menu, and then enter the name of the
measure in the text box.
If you selected Objective, enter the name of the objective in the
Design Study
Design Variable
Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.
Default Levels
Enter the number of levels (values) you want to use only if you specified a
range for the design variable.
If you specified a range for the design variable, Adams/View uses
equally spaced levels across the range. You specify the number of
levels in the Default Levels text box.
If you specified a list of values for the design variable,
A - D 213
Design Evaluation Tools
Do the following:
Begins the simulation.
After you select Start, Adams/View runs a simulation for each level of the
design variable. When the simulations are done, Adams/View returns the
variable to its original value.
Design of Experiments
Design Variables
Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.
Default Levels
Enter the number of levels (values) you want to use only if you specified a
range for the design variable.
Trials defined by
Select either Built-In DOE Technique, Direct Input, or File Input from
the pull-down menu.
If you selected built-in techniques, use the DOE Technique pull-
trial matrix.
DOE Technique
selects from equally spaced values across the range. You enter the
number of values in the Default Levels text box.
If you specified a list of values for a design variable, Adams/View
selects directly from those values, ignoring the value in the Default
Levels text box.
Check Variables Guess #
of Runs.
(Appears only if you selected Full Factiorial as the DOE Technique above)
Select if you want to check that the variables have the same number of
levels and display the required number of runs.
214 Adams/View
Design Evaluation Tools
Do the following:
(Appears only if you selected Direct Input for Trials Defined by)
Enter the number of trials (simulations) and the trial matrix.
(Appears only if you selected File Input for Trials Defined by)
Enter the name of the file containing the trial matrix.
(Appears only if you selected File Input for Trials Defined by)
Select to edit the trial matrix file.
Preview
Shows you each configuration of your model for every design variable.
Displays an alert box asking you if you want to pause after each
configuration. Select YES to pause.
Start
Begins the simulation. Adams/View runs a simulation for each trial that the
DOE technique or trial matrix defines. When the simulations are done,
Adams/View returns the variables to their original values.
Optimization
Design Variables
Select if you want to automatically save the original values of the design
variables before starting the optimization analysis.
Goal
Contraints
Select if you want to add contraints and then enter the names of the
constraints in the text box that appears.
A - D 215
Design Evaluation Tools
Do the following:
Begins the simulation.
The last iteration will be the best values that the optimization could find
without violating constraints or limits. Adams/View normally leaves the
design variables set to the optimized values. If you interrupt the analysis or
Adams/View encounters an error during the analysis, Adams/View resets
the variables to their original values.
If you do not want to keep the optimized values, and you selected the Auto.
Save check box or used the Save button to save the original values, you can
select the Restore button to return the variables to their original values.
Displays the Solver Settings dialog box for either display, output, or
optimizer options.
Note that each button brings up a different option in the Solver Settings
Dialog Box.
You can:
Select to display the Save Design Evaluation Results dialog box to
Displays the Plot Design Evaluation Results dialog box to display the
results as a plot.
Displays the Design Evaluation Results Table dialog box to display the
results as a table.
Displays the Update Design Variables dialog box to let you update the
design variables.
216 Adams/View
Dialog-Box Builder
Dialog-Box Builder
Tools Dialog Box Create
Allows you to create and modify Dialog boxes to better suit your needs and preferences.
A - D 217
Discrete Flexible Link
Creates a discrete flexible link consisting of two or more rigid bodies connected by beam force elements.
You indicate the following and Adams/View creates the appropriate parts, Geometry, Forces, and
Constraints at the endpoints:
Endpoints of the link
Number of parts and the material type
Properties of the beam
Types of endpoint attachments (flexible, rigid, or free)
Note:
For more information on beam force elements, see Beam. Also note the caution about the
asymmetry of beams.
218 Adams/View
Discrete Flexible Link
Do the following:
Material
Enter the type of material to be used for the rigid bodies and beam
properties. Learn about Standard Material Properties.
Segments
Enter the number of rigid bodies that you want in the link.
Damping Ratio
Enter the ratio of viscous damping to stiffness for the beam forces.
Color
Enter the color to be used for the geometry in the flexible link.
Marker 1
Enter the marker that defines the start of the link. Learn about Positioning
Flexible Links.
Note:
Attachment
Cross Section
Select one of the following to define the geometry of the link or specify the
area and area moments of inertia of the flexible link.
Solid Rectangle
Solid Circle
Hollow Rectangle
Hollow Circle
I-Beam
Properties
A - D 219
Display Attribute
Display Attribute
Database Navigator Display Attribute
Allows you to set how individual, types of objects, and children of objects appear in Adams/View.
Learn about Setting Appearance of Objects Through the Database Navigator.
Do the following:
Visibility
Name Vis
Color
Transparency
The higher the value, the more transparent the object is, allowing other
objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object
is, covering other objects.
Tip:
Line Style
Line Width
Select the weight for the line style. The weight values range from 1 to 5
screen pixels
Icon Size
Enter the size you want for the icons. Note that these changes take
precedence over the size you specify globally for the modeling database as
explained Setting Screen Icon Display.
Active
Apply
Object/Siblings/All
Use to set the types and names to which you want the display attributes
applied. In the text box, enter the name of the objects you want to display
in the text box, and then use the pull-down menu to the right to select the
type of object(s) you want to display.
220 Adams/View
Display Log File
Shows you a log of the commands you executed and messages that you receive. The Log file marks
messages as comments so Adams/View does not try to execute them. It indicates a comment by placing
an exclamation mark (!) in front of the message.
Adams/View also displays as comments any commands that it executes when it starts up. To help you
distinguish the startup commands from messages, Adams/View follows the exclamation mark (!) with
the command prompt (>>).
Adams/View does not update the Display Log File dialog box each time you enter a command. You must
select Update to see the new command/message.
By default, Adams/View only shows warning, errors, and fatal messages that you have received. To
change the type of messages displayed and to display commands that Adams/View executed, use the
options below.
Learn about Using the Adams/View Log File.
Do the following:
Select if you want to change the type of messages displayed.
You must have Show only lines of type selected to select one of the following:
Info
Warning
Error
Fatal
Show only lines containing Optional. Select if you want to apply a string filter so the log file only
displays lines that contain certain information, such as display only
commands that create links.
Enter the text that the line must contain in the text box. You can also enter
wildcards.
Suppress duplicate lines
Select if you want to remove any duplicate lines that occur if you
encounter the same error again.
Update
A - D 221
Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack
Contains tools for dynamically rotating the View in the View window.
222 Adams/View
Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack
E-I
E - I 223
Edit Appearance Dialog Box
Sets how individual objects or types of objects appear in Adams/View. You can set the appearance of any
modeling object in your Modeling database or for a group of objects.
Learn about:
Setting object appearance
Using Wildcards
Icon Settings Dialog Box
Do the following:
To explicitly specify an object, enter the name of the object whose appearance
you want to set.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Once the name of the object is in the text box, press Enter to update the dialog
box.
Types
Visibility
Select how you want to set the visibility of the selected object or objects. You
can select:
On - Turns on the display of the objects.
Off - Turns off the display of the objects.
Inherit - Lets the objects simply inherit the display settings from its
Select whether or not you want the name of the objects displayed in the View
window. Refer to the options above for Visibility for an explanation of the
choices.
224 Adams/View
Edit Appearance Dialog Box
Do the following:
Color and Color Scope Enter the color you want used for the objects and set which elements of the
objects should be affected by the selected color. You can select:
Polygon Fill - Sets the color of those areas of a graphic that can be
To browse for a color in the Database Navigator or create a new color, rightclick the Color text box, and then select Browse or Create.
Render
appearance. It does not show edges. The light source is from the
upper left.
Wireframe - Shows only the edges of objects so that you can see
Set how transparent the object or objects are. The higher the value, the more
transparent the object is, allowing other objects to show through. The lower
the value, the more opaque the object is, covering other objects.
Tip:
Enter the size you want for the icons or the amount by which you want to
scale the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale
factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1 reduces
the size of the icons and a scale factor greater than 1 increases the size of the
icons. Note that these changes take precedence over the size you specify
globally for the modeling database.
E - I 225
Edit Background Color
Lets you create a background color for the View window by setting its red, green, and blue light
percentages and change the background of all view windows to this new color. You cannot add the color
to the preset palette of colors or change the colors in the preset palette but you can set the gradient effect.
226 Adams/View
Edit Background Color
Note:
You can also change the background color using the Edit Color dialog box. Learn about
changing object colors, including the background.
Do the following:
Displays current color and color as you edit.
Palette of preset
colors
Shows the preset colors that appear in the Main toolbox when you select a
background color from the Background color tool stack. You cannot change
these colors.
Red
Use the slider to change the red values, as desired. As you change the color
values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
Green
Use the slider to change the green values, as desired. As you change the color
values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
Blue
Use the slider to change the blue values, as desired. As you change the color
values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
Gradient
If Gradient is checked, then radio buttons became active and you have options
to select Gradient top-light or Gradient top-dark. If Gradient is unchecked, then
both are disabled and unselected.
E - I 227
Edit Color
Edit Color
Settings Colors
Allows you to modify the colors used for displaying objects or create a new color.
Do the following:
Color
New Color
Displays the Create New Color dialog box so you can define a new color name
in the Modeling database.
Displays the old or default color on the left side. Displays the new color on the
right side and changes shades as you move the sliders below.
Red
Use the slider to determine the amount of red to be used in the new color.
Green
Use the slider to determine the amount of green to be used in the new color.
Blue
Use the slider to determine the amount of blue to be used in the new color.
228 Adams/View
Enable or Disable a Range of Modes
Lets you disable or enable a group of modes based on either their mode number or frequency by entering
a range of values. Learn more about Enabling and Disabling Modes.
Do the following:
Disable/Enable
frequency/mode number
between/above/below and
text boxes
E - I 229
Entering File Names in Text Boxes
230 Adams/View
Entering Object Names in Text Boxes
E - I 231
Example of Information Window
232 Adams/View
Execute System Command
You can execute an operating system command from within Adams/View so that you do not have to leave
the Adams/View window.
You can select to display the results of the command in the Information Window or the Log file. If you
select to display the results of the command in the Information window, you can:
Clear the window and only view the results of the command.
Save the results of the command to a file.
If you select to display the results in the log file, you can keep the command results with the other
commands that you execute so that you can cut and paste the information together into a new file.
Do the following:
Command
E - I 233
Exit and Save?
If you did not save your work, asks you if you want to save your work:
To save your work and exit Adams/View, select OK. If you want to save the model with a new
name in the current directory, enter the new name in the Filename text box.
To exit without saving your work, select Exit, Dont Save.
To continue using Adams/View, select Cancel.
Note:
If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams/View Log file
(aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about Using the Adams/View Log File.
234 Adams/View
Export Dialog Box
Exports data from Adams/PostProcessor. You can export the following formats:
Numeric Data
Spreadsheet Data
Table
DAC/RPC (For Adams/Durability only; see the Adams/Durability online help.)
HTML Report
E - I 235
Export - Adams/PostProcessor Files
Exports data from Adams/View for use with a stand-alone version of Adams/PostProcessor. When you
export Adams/PostProcessor files, Adams/View generates a command file (.cmd) and all required
supporting files, including:
Dataset (.adm) file
Shell (.shl) files needed for geometry representation
Matrix (.mtx) files for use with the .adm file, if needed
The command file also contains commands to read in the other files when you import the command file
into Adams/PostProcessor.
Note:
The simulation results are not referenced in the command file. You must import the
analysis files (graphics, request, and results files) separately into Adams/PostProcessor.
For more information, see Import - Adams/Solver Analysis Files.
Adams/View names the command file ModelName_to_ppt.cmd, where ModelName is the name of the
model. For example, if the model from which you are exporting data is suspension14, then the command
file is suspension14_to_ppt.cmd.
Do the following:
File Type
Model Name
Enter the name of the model from which you want the data exported.
236 Adams/View
Export - Adams/Solver Analysis Files
Exports Adams/Solver analysis files, which are a set of output files that Adams/Solver generates during
a single Simulation. You can export them as a set or individually. The files include:
Graphics
Request
Results
Adams/View exports only a set of output files generated from the same Adams/Solver simulation.
Do the following:
Enter the name you want to assign to the analysis file or files. You do not need to
enter the file extension, because Adams/View adds the extensions for you.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse for
the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File
Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.
Analysis Name
Enter the name of the simulation whose data you want to export.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
E - I 237
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset
Exporting a model as an Adams/Solver dataset is a convenient method for transferring a model from one
computer platform to another. When you export a model as an Adams/Solver dataset, Adams/View
preserves the database names in your model by writing them as comments in the Adams/Solver dataset.
This allows you to import the dataset at a later date and still have the original database names.
Your model does not have to be complete to be exported as an Adams/Solver dataset. If you want to check
your model for completeness and consistency, verify your model before exporting the dataset.
Do the following:
Enter the name you want to assign to the dataset file. You do not need to enter
the file extension .adm, because Adams/View assumes that is the file extension.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse
for the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the
File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog
box.
Model Name
Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Use Parasolid
Select either:
As is - Adams/View exports any geometry that was imported from a
Parasolid file out to a Parasolid file when it writes the command file. The
command file references the newly created Parasolid file. All other
geometry (for example, cylinder, shell, and spring-dampers) are defined
using Adams/View command language and included in the command file.
Full - Adams/View exports all static geometry to Parasolid files instead of
it in an information window.
238 Adams/View
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset
Do the following:
Enter the number of spaces used to indent the continuation line of a statement.
The allowed values are between 0 and 4 spaces. (Five or more spaces make the
subsequent text on the line a comment.) The default is 1 space.
Adams/View does not indent the text for continuation lines of function
expressions. It assumes that you will add any leading spaces that you want for
indentation of functions. Any indentation Adams/View would enter would
interfere with the indention used to show nesting of IFfunctions. Adams/View
does, however, indent the argument list of a user function if it requires more
than one line.
Adams/View precedes the values of an argument that has multiple string values
separated by colons with a comma and indents the values if you place them on
a continuation line. This applies to the PART/EXACT and COUPLER/TYPE
arguments. It does not apply to the REQUEST/TITLE argument, which doesn't
allow embedded spaces. Instead, Adams/View precedes a REQUEST/TITLE
argument with a comma.
Decimal Places
Enter the number of decimal places written after the decimal point for real
numbers
Zero Threshold
Significant Digits
Scientific Notation
Specify where the format for real numbers switches from a fixed point format
to scientific notation. Enter the lower and upper power of 10. Separate the
values with commas (,). The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that
Adams/View writes any number less than or equal to 1.0E-04 or greater than
or equal to 1.0E+05 in scientific notation.
E - I 239
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset
Do the following:
As Found In Original
File/
Put Markers Where
Used/
Keep Markers with
Parts
Control the organization of the statements within the dataset by specifying one
of the following:
As Found In Original File - Maintains the order of the statements in the
after statements that depend on the markers. These include the statements:
BEAM, BUSHING, FIELD, SFORCE, SPRINGDAMPER, VFORCE,
VTORQUE, GFORCE, NFORCE, JOINT, JPRIM, REQUEST,
MREQUEST, CVCV, and PTCV.
If none of these types of statements use a marker, Adams/View writes the
marker statement after the part statement to which it belongs.
Adams/View writes graphic statements that belong to a single part after the
markers for that part, and writes graphic statements that connect one or
more parts after all the part statements are written.
It writes statements of the same type, such as JOINTs, JPRIMs,
BUSHINGs, as a group, in order of ascending Adams IDs.
Keep Markers with Parts - Writes the markers that belong to a part as a
group after the part to which they belong. In addition, Adams/View writes
the graphic statements that belong to a single part after the marker
statements for that part, and writes graphic statements that connect one or
more parts after all the part statements. Adams/View also writes statements
of the same type, such as JOINTs, JPRIMs, and BUSHINGs, as a group, in
order of ascending Adams IDs.
In general, Adams/View writes any statements that depend on other statements
before the statements that depend on them. For example, it writes marker
statements before the joint statements that use them, and writes joint statements
before any coupler statements that connect them.
Roundoff Values
Select to set whether or not arguments that have default values are written
explicitly into the dataset. The default is to not write default values into the
dataset.
240 Adams/View
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset
Do the following:
Select to write as many parameters and their values that fit within 80 columns
for each line of the statement. For example:
PART/1, QG = 0.5, 0, 0, REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D, MASS = 1.2
To control the case of the text of statement keywords and parameters, select one
of the following:
Upper Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
Select Include Trailing Zeros to print all the digits after the decimal point
whether they are zero or not. If you do not select Include Trailing Zeros,
Adams/View drops any zeros at the end of the fractional part of the number
leaving the last digit as a non-zero digit.
Select Export All Graphics to write all the graphics into the dataset. If this
option is not checked, only the dataset graphics that are supported by the solver
(such as BOX) and those that are referenced by contacts, are included in the
dataset.
Verify Model
E - I 241
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset
COMMENT STRING:
STRING REQUEST:
TITLE, COMMENT, FUNCTION, and F1 to F8 MREQUEST:
COMMENT UCON:
FUNCTION MOTION:
FUNCTION FIELD:
FUNCTION SFORCE:
FUNCTION GFORCE:
FUNCTION VFORCE:
FUNCTION VTORQUE:
FUNCTION VARIABLE:
FUNCTION CURVE:
FUNCTION DIFF:
FUNCTION GSE:
FUNCTION SENSOR:
FUNCTION:
242 Adams/View
Export - Adams/Solver Script Files
Do the following:
File Type
File Name
File Name is optional. If not specified, a file with the same name as that of the
script, will be exported to Adams/View working directory. You do not need to
enter the file extension, because Adams/View adds the extension (.acf) for you.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name and the file name in the File Name
text box. To browse for the directory in which you want to export the command
file, right-click the File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the
File Selection dialog box.
E - I 243
Export - Adams/View Command File
When you export a model as a command file, Adams/View creates a file containing all the commands
necessary to create the selected model. Exporting a model as an Adams/View command file is helpful
when you want to move a model from one type of computer platform to another. Note that the order of
commands in the command file may not be in the same order as you entered them in Adams/View.
Saving a model as a command file does not save your simulation results or analysis files. To save your
analysis files, set up Adams/View so that it saves the analysis files.
Do the following:
Enter the name you want to assign to the command file. You do not need to enter
the file extension .cmd, because Adams/View assumes that is the file extension.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse for
the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File
Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.
Model Name
Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Use Parasolid
Select either:
As is - Adams/View exports any geometry that was imported from a
Parasolid file out to a Parasolid file when it writes the command file. The
command file references the newly created Parasolid file. All other
geometry (for example, cylinder, shell, and spring-dampers) are defined
using Adams/View command language and included in the command file.
Full - Adams/View exports all static geometry to Parasolid files instead of
244 Adams/View
Export - CAD (IGES, STEP, DXG, DWG, and Parasolid)
Exports CAD geometry using Adams/Exchange. It writes the geometric definition of an Adams model
or part from to the specified CAD file format. You can then read the CAD file into a CAD program.
You can export an entire model, an individual part of a model, or a model as it exists at a particular
simulation time, which is helpful for transferring position data of an Adams model to a drafting program
to prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation.
Do the following:
File Type
Set to type of geometry that you want to export (IGES, STEP, DXF, DWG,
or Parasolid).
File Name
Enter the name of the file that you want to create. The file will contain the
exported CAD geometry. You do not need to enter a file extension.
Adams/Exchange automatically generates the appropriate extension for the
type of geometry you are exporting. For example, if you are exporting IGES
geometry, Adams/Exchange adds an .igs extension.
File Type
For Parasolid geometry only, set to the type of Parasolid geometry file to
create.
Part/Model/Analysis
Name
Select the geometry that you want to export, and then enter the name of
the geometry in the text box next to the pull-down menu. You can select:
Model Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View model to be written to
the CAD file. Adams/Exchange places each rigid body in the model on a
separate level. All geometry written to the IGES file is defined with
respect to the global coordinate system of the Adams/View model.
Part Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View part to be written to the
CAD file. Adams/Exchange writes all the geometry owned by the part
to the CAD file. It defines all geometry in the CAD file with respect to
the part coordinate system.
Analysis Name - Lets you export a model at a particular simulation
E - I 245
Export - DAC or RPC III
You can export either DAC Format or RPC III Format request files from Adams/View after a simulation
completes. This technique does not require you to set up requests before running the simulation.
By definition, results output to an RPC III or DAC file must have constant time steps. If the results data
being output includes non-constant time steps, Adams/View issues a warning, and the time axis of the
data will be warped so that the time interval is constant.
Do the following:
File Type
File to Read
Enter the name of the DAC or RPC III file that you want to export.
Results Data
Select the result set components you want to export. The result set components
can come from results sets, measures, or requests. You can only have one
result set per DAC file. To select the data, right-click the Result Data text box,
point to Result_Set_Component, and then select Browse to display the
Database Navigator.
246 Adams/View
Export - FEA Loads
E - I 247
Export - FEA Loads
Do the following:
File Type
File Format
Select the file format for the loads file that you want Adams/View to
create.
Inertia
Clear the selection of this option if you would like to output external
loads only.
When selected, Adams/View outputs inertia loads in addition to
Enter the name of the file to be created. If you want the file written to a
directory other than the one from which you are running Adams/View,
enter the path name in the File Name text box.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Analysis
Select whether the body whose load information you want to export is a
rigid or flexible body.
For a rigid body only, enter the marker to which all load information will
be relative. The marker location and orientation must correspond to the
origin of the part in the FEA program.
For a flexible body only, enter the name of the flexible body. Adams/View
assumes that its FEA origin is the same as it was when the flexible body
was defined.
You can skip the next two options in the following cases:
For flexible bodies because the node IDs at each load location are known.
For rigid bodies if the node IDs are not available. Then, the FEA input file will contain the
locations (with respect to the FEA coordinate reference) and Adams ID label of the marker at
each load location. You will need to edit the file, however, replacing these labels with the
actual node IDs, once they are known.
248 Adams/View
Export - FEA Loads
Do the following:
Select to have Adams/View calculate the points on the part where forces
are applied.
Adams/View calculates the load points and places the points and their
locations in the Nodes table of the File Export dialog box. The node
coordinates are displayed relative to the FEA origin of the rigid or
flexible body. You might need to resize the File Export dialog box to see
all the point locations. See Example of Nodes Table.
For rigid bodies only, assign node IDs to the load points Adams/View
found, if desired. You can do one of the following:
Type in the node IDs in the Node Id column fields.
Select Scan file for IDs to have Adams/View read in a text file
containing the node IDs. For more information using a text file,
see Process for Exporting FEA Loads.
Because the loads file is a text file, you can always add the node IDs to
the file as you add the load case to your FEA dataset.
Note:
Output at times
E - I 249
Export - FEA Loads
Caution:
Note that loads are output in the Adams/View modeling units. These units must be
consistent with those specified in the finite element model or the results of the FE analysis
that includes the Adams loads will be incorrect. After completing the Export FEA Loads
dialog box, Adams/View displays the current modeling units and gives you a chance to
modify them before continuing with the FEA loads export.
250 Adams/View
Export - HTML Report
Exports data in the current session of Adams/PostProcessor as HTML pages for viewing by others in your
organization. It also creates
Plots and animations as png or jpg images
Movies of animations
Information on the parts, constraints, forces, and more in the selected models. This is the same
Tab
Link
Files
Title Page
Pages
Models
E - I 251
Export - HTML Report - FIles
Defines the name of the files in which to export Adams/PostProcessor data and where to place the files.
Do the following:
File Name
Enter the name you want applied to each of the resulting HTML files and
style sheets.
Output Directory
Enter where you want the resulting HTML files and folders to be stored.
252 Adams/View
Export - HTML Report - Models
Selects the models for which you want to export information. When you export model information, you
output information about the model objects: parts, constraints, forces, measures, requests, and assembly
objects. Adams/PostProcessor creates a folder for each model and objects in the model, grouped by type.
Do the following:
Enter the name of the models.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
E - I 253
Export - HTML Report - Pages
Defines the pages of data you want to export and in which formats to publish them.
Do the following:
Pages
Select the pages of plots and animations you want exported. If you select Range,
enter the pages you want included.
Image Format
For the pages of plots, enter the image format in which to store the pages of plots.
You can select png or jpg.
Maintain Aspect
Ratio
Clear to change the proportions of the page sizes, and then enter new values for
Image Width and Height (see above).
Export
Animations
Select to export the animations as a movie. Clear to just save an image of the first
frame of the animation in the same format selected in Image Format.
Movie Format
Select the type of movie to export the animation as. You can select: Compressed
.avi, Uncompressed .avi, .jpg, .mpg, or .png (AVI format is only available on
Windows).
If you select .jpg or .png, Adams/Processor, exports each frame as an png or
254 Adams/View
Export - HTML Report - Title Page
Defines what you want displayed on the title page to provide basic information about the exported data.
The title page appears when you first display the homepage. You can also enter an image to appear in the
upper right corner of the title page. The image must be a format supported in Web browsers (.gif, .jpg,
.png).
Do the following:
Title
Author
Date
Enter the date the data was published. Adams/PostProcessor enters the
current date by default.
Comment
Image File
Enter the path and file of an image to appear in the upper right corner.
E - I 255
Export - Numeric Test Data
You can export the data that Adams generates during Simulations for use in other applications.
Do the following:
File Type
Enter the name of the results set component or components that you
want to export.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Sort By
Set to either:
Value to sort the values in the result set by the magnitude.
Time (the default) to sort the values in the result set by the
Specify the order in which you want the values listed in the file. Select
either ascending or descending.
File Name
Specify the name of the file in which you want to save the data. If you
want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you
are running Adams, enter the path name.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Above Value/
Below Value
Write to Terminal
256 Adams/View
Export - Shell
Export - Shell
File Export Shell
You can export Adams geometry for use as shell geometry in other applications.
Do the following:
Enter the name of the shell object that you want to export.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
File Name
Enter the name of the file to which you want to export the geometry.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
E - I 257
Export - Spreadsheet Data
You can export an Adams/View result set to a file in spreadsheet format. By exporting the result set to a
spreadsheet, you can view and manipulate the information in spreadsheet software packages including
formatting it or performing additional calculations on it. Tabs separate the data in the exported file.
Do the following:
File Type
File Name
Enter the name you want to assign to the spreadsheet file. By default, Adams
creates the spreadsheet with a .tab extension.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Enter the name of the results set that you want to export.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
258 Adams/View
Export - Table
Export - Table
File Export Table
Do the following:
File name
Enter the name of the file in which to store the table data.
Plot
Enter the name of the plot containing the data. Tips on entering object
names in text boxes.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Format
E - I 259
Export - Wavefront
Export - Wavefront
File Export Wavefront
You can export Adams/View graphics and motion data to Wavefront to help you create animations in
Wavefront Technologies advanced photorealistic rendering product, the Advanced Visualizer. You can
also select to only export the model geometry, in which case Adams/View only creates object files.
Do the following:
File Type
Model Name/
Analysis Name
Select either depending on what information you want to export, and then enter the
name of the model or analysis you want exported in the text box next to the pulldown menu:
If you select Model Name, you export only your model geometry.
If you select Analysis, you export all motion and geometry data. You can enter
260 Adams/View
Extrusion Tool
Extrusion Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Extrusion Tool
Creates an Extrusion. To create an extrusion, you can specify points or select a curve that defines the
extrusions profile:
The Extrusion tool extrudes the points or curve along the z-axis of the screen or Working grid, if it is
turned on. When you specify points, you can also specify the direction along the z-axis that the Extrusion
tool extrudes the profile. You can also select to extrude along a path.
You can select to create the extrusion using the Analytical Method or Non-analytical Method.
E - I 261
Extrusion Tool
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the extrusion to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the extrusion to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence the
simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car driving
around a race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be added to
ground.
Create profile by
Closed
Forward/
About Center/
Backward/
Along Path
Select the direction you want the profile to be extruded relative to the global
coordinate system or working grid. You can set the direction to one of the
following:
Forward - Extrude the profile along the +z-axis.
About Center - Extrude the profile half the depth in both the +z and
-z directions.
Backward - Extrude the profile along the -z-axis.
Along Path - Select the path along which to extrude the wire
geometry.
Learn more about Extruding Construction Geometry Along a Path. See an
Example of Extrusion Directions.
Length
Enter the depth of the extrusion. (Not available when you select Along Path,
as explained above.)
Analytical
Select to create an extrusion using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the
Non-analytical Method.
262 Adams/View
Extrusion Tool
Note:
After you draw the extrusion, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to
create the extrusion, hotpoints appear at every vertex in the profile and at the point directly
opposite from where you began drawing the profile. If you used the analytical method,
hotpoints appear along the curves that define the extrusion. Use the vertex hotpoints to
modify the profile of the extrusion and the opposite hotpoint to control the depth of the
extrusion. See Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also use the extrusion modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that
make up the profile and read in location points from a file. See Using Dialog Boxes to
Precisely Modify Geometry and using the Location Table.
E - I 263
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
Do the following:
Curve Name
Y-Axis
Start Time
Enter the start time on the curve for which you want the signal
processing performed.
End Time
Enter the end time on the curve for which you want the signal
processing performed.
Window Type
Select the type of window type you want to use. Learn more about the
window functions.
Points/Points (Power of 2)
Select if you want to detrend the signal. This subtracts the linear least
square fit from the data stream.
Enter the number of segments, which means that the signal will be
split in that many segments of equal length (window length).
Or, you can enter the segment length directly. This is often referred to
as the window length.
Overlap Points
264 Adams/View
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 3D
Constructs a three-dimensional (3D) Fast fourier transform (FFT) plot by performing signal processing
on individual slices of a curve. You define a slice size, and Adams/PostProcessor slides this over a range
of a curve, overlapping the slices as specified. Each slice of the curve becomes a row in the 3D plot
surface.
Do the following:
Curve Name
Y-Axis
Enter the start and end time to define the entire range of the curve on
which you want signal processing performed.
Percentage Overlap
Window Type
Points/Points (Power of 2) Select the number of points to be used for the FFT.
Tips on Selecting Points
Select if you want to detrend the signal. This subtracts the linear least
square fit from the data stream.
Enter the number of equal segments into which the signal will be split.
Or, you can enter the segment length directly. This is often referred to as
the window length.
Overlap Points
Enter the number of overlaps, which indicates how many signal samples
are used.
E - I 265
FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table
Select Peak Slice to output FE model data only at those time steps
In the Flex Body text box, enter the flexible body whose data
266 Adams/View
FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table
If you selected:
Nodal Deformation
E - I 267
FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table
If you selected:
Stress and Strain
268 Adams/View
Field Element Tool
Do the following:
Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes
of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector
you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams/View automatically
calculates the x- and y-axes.
E - I 269
File Export
File Export
File Export Shared Dialog Box
Exports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different
Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturers products.
Learn about exporting:
Adams/Solver Dataset
Adams/Solver Analysis Files (Graphics, Requests, and Results)
Adams/Solver Script files (*.acf)
Adams/View Command Files
Numeric Data
CAD (STEP, IGES, DXG/DWG, Parasolid) (Adams/Exchange only)
CatiaV4, CatiaV5, STEP, IGES, Acis, VDA (Adams CAD Translators only)
Wavefront
Shell Geometry
FEA Loads
Spreadsheet Data
Adams/PostProcessor
DAC/RPC III
270 Adams/View
File Import
File Import
File Import Shared Dialog Box
Imports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different
Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturers products.
Learn about importing:
Adams/View command files
Adams/Solver datasets
Adams/Solver analysis files
Adams/Solver Script files (*.acf)
Test data
STEP, IGES, DXF, DWG (Adams/Exchange only)
CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA (Adams
E - I 271
File Import - Adams/PPT
Imports data into Adams/PostProcessor. In addition to importing the same data you can import into
Adams/View, Adams/PostProcessor also imports Reports and plot configuration files for template-based
products.
To import standard data:
See the Adams/View File Import dialog box.
To import a report:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, and then select Report.
2. Enter the name of the file to import.
3. Select OK.
To load a report in a viewport:
Right-click the background of a viewport, and then select Load Report.
To import a plot configuration file for template-based products:
See Creating Plots Using a Plot Configuration File.
272 Adams/View
Files
Files
Settings Solver Output More Output Category Files
Selecting Files as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set advanced options
for Adams/Solver analysis files.
Do the following:
Specify whether or not Adams/View prints time-response-request tables in the
Tabular output file.
If you set to On, Adams/View writes tables for each request in your model.
If you set to Off, Adams/View does not write the tables. If your simulation
has many output steps or you have many requests, specifying Off results in a
much smaller tabular output file and conserves disk space.
Separator
Specify whether or not Adams writes separators to the request, graphics, results,
and tabular output files when you modify the model topology in the middle of a
Simulation. When running a Scripted simulation, you can change the model
topology by adding Adams commands to your script file to activate an element,
deactivate an element, change a marker position, or change the type or point of
application of a force or constraint.
If you set to On (which is the default), Adams/Solver reads the analysis
information into Adams/View, one analysis for each block of output between
the separators.
If you set to Off, Adams/Solver reads the analysis information into
Set to Yes to specify that rotational values are to be output in yaw, pitch, and roll
coordinates, rather than in psi, theta, and phi coordinates. First Adams rotates
about the z-axis, then about the new negative y-axis (y'), and then about the
second new x-axis (x"). Note that Yaw Pitch Roll only affects rotational
displacement output. Adams/View always outputs angular velocities and
accelerations as vectors, with orthogonal x, y, and z components.
E - I 273
Fillet Tool
Fillet Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Fillet Tool
You can think of creating filleted edges as rolling a ball over the edges or corners of the geometry to round
them.
274 Adams/View
Fillet Tool
When filleting an edge or corner, you can specify a start and an end radius for the fillet to create a variable
fillet:
Adams/View begins creating the variable fillet using the start radius and then slowly increases or
decreases the size of the fillet until it reaches the end radius. Using the ball analogy again, Adams/View
starts rounding edges and corners using one size ball and finishes using a different size.
Note:
Learn about:
You will get different results when you fillet one edge at a time than when you fillet all
edges at once. Also, you may not be able to fillet an edge if an adjoining edge has already
been filleted. It depends on the complexity of the filleting.
E - I 275
Fillet Tool
Do the following:
Radius
End Radius
To create a variable fillet, enter the end radius. The Fillet tool uses the value you
enter for radius as the starting radius of the variable fillet.
276 Adams/View
Fixed Joint Tool
Creates a fixed joint that locks two parts together so they cannot move with respect to each other. The
effect is similar to defining two parts as a single part. If you want to have the two parts move relative to
each other in a future Simulation, simply delete the fixed joint and use another type of joint.
For a fixed joint, the location and orientation of the joint often do not affect the outcome of the simulation.
In these cases, you can place the joint at a location where the graphic icon is easily visible. However,
occasionally the placement of the fixed joint can allow force moments to become quite large depending
on where you place the joint, as shown in this example. In this case, be sure to place it where you get the
results you want.
E - I 277
Fixed Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want to connect the joint to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.
Learn about Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Geometry Feature
278 Adams/View
Flexible Body Mode Filter
Lets you select a filter type to remove modes from the animation display. By default, all enabled modes
are used to generate nodal displacements for each flexible body during animations. To increase animation
performance, Adams/Flex has three filters that let you remove graphically insignificant modes for
animations. A mode that is filtered out is excluded from the modal superposition and any contribution to
the deformation of the body is ignored. Note that these modes are not filtered out for numeric operations,
such as signal processing or xy plotting.
Do the following:
Flex Body
Filter Modes By
frequency.
Min Displacement - Excludes any mode that does not contribute the
modes, and excludes any mode that doesn't contribute displacement of one
vertex at least as significant as a percentage of the maximum. For example,
setting the percentage filter at 15% excludes any mode not contributing at
least 15% of the most dominant mode. This calculation is performed for
each frame of the animation, therefore, allowing the set of significant
modes to change throughout the simulation.
Filter Value
Enter the frequency, minimum displacement, or percentage for the specified filter.
E - I 279
Flexible Body Modify
Lets you modify a flexible body. For example, you can change its modal content to improve the efficiency
or accuracy of a Simulation.
Do the following:
Flexible Body
Damping Ratio
damping as follows:
1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100.
10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range.
100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000.
Clear the selection of default, and then either:
Enter the scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.
Enter a function. To get help building the function, next to the
Set the datum node for which you want deformation color changes to be
relative to using Adams/Flex. Adams/Flex considers the deformation to be
relative to the origin of the flexible body (its local body reference frame
(LBRF) or coordinate system) by default. For example, if you were modeling
a cantilever beam in Adams/Flex, you could specify that deformations should
be relative to the clamped end as is illustrated in the first tutorial, Building and
Simulating a Flexible Model, in Getting Started Using Adams/Flex.
To set the datum node:
1. Clear the selection of LBRF.
2. In the Datum Node text box, enter the number of the desired node.
Tip:
280 Adams/View
Flexible Body Modify
Do the following:
Click to display the Modify Body - Name and Position dialog box and set the
name, Adams/Solver ID, and location of the flexible body.
Position ICs
Click to display the Modify Body - Position Initial Conditions dialog box and set
the initial position for a flexible body before the simulation starts, just as you
can for any part in Adams/View. You can set how you want Adams/View to
calculate these properties as well as define these properties yourself.
Velocity ICs
Click to display the Modify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions dialog box and set
the initial velocity for a flexible body before the simulation starts just as you
can for any part in Adams/View. You can set how you want Adams/View to
calculate these properties as well as define these properties yourself.
Modal ICs
Click to display the Modify Modal ICs dialog box to disable or enable range of
modes using a table. Learn About Flexible Body Modal Content.
Enter the number of the mode in the flexible body to view, and then press
Enter. The total number of modes in the flexible body appear to the right of the
Mode Number text box.
When you display a mode, Adams/Flex displays its frequency in the
Frequency text box. Also, when you display a mode, the mode deformations
appear along with the undeformed flexible body. You can turn this off to
display only the deformed mode.
Learn more about Viewing Modes.
Select to display the next mode.
Select to animate the specified mode to see how it deforms. By default, the
animation runs 3 times or through 3 cycles. (Use the Cycles text box (described
below) to change the number of cycles.)
Tip:
You can also use the Animation tool on the Main toolbox to
animate the entire model containing the flexible body after you've
run a simulation.
E - I 281
Flexible Body Modify
Do the following:
Select to display the previous mode.
Frequency
Enter the frequency of the mode you'd like to view, and then press Enter.
The mode closest to the specified frequency appears.
Cycles
Enter the number of times Adams/Flex should run the animation. By default,
the animation runs 3 times or through 3 cycles.
Superimpose
Clear to display only the mode deformations. Select to display both the mode
deformations and the undeformed flexible body.
Enable or disable the mode number in the Mode Number text box. If you
disable a mode, its mode number and natural frequency appear in parentheses.
range
Click to display the Enable or Disable a Range of Modes dialog box to disable
or enable a group of modes based on either their mode number or frequency.
auto
Click to display the Auto Disable Modes by Strain Energy dialog box to disable
or enable modes based on their contribution of strain energy.
Substituting Graphics with an Outline (Learn more about Substituting Outline Graphics for the Finite
Element Mesh.)
full MNF graphics
Select to turn on the viewing of the full MNF graphics; clear to turn off the
viewing.
Outline
Select a formulation option or select Custom. Learn more about the options.
When you select Custom, Adams/Flex displays a Custom Inertial Modeling
dialog box that lets you set up the invariants that you want selected.
282 Adams/View
Flexible Body Modify
Do the following:
Select a plot type to view in Adams/Flex:
Contour - Sets Adams/Flex so that it displays Contour plots. In
Mode Filter
Select to display the Flexible Body Mode Filter dialog box to exclude nodal
deformations from animations to increase animation performance.
Move the Deformation Scale Factor slider to change the amount by which
Adams/Flex deforms a mode. For greater exaggeration, type a value in the text
box next to the slider. Changing the deformation scale lets you exaggerate
deformations that might otherwise be too subtle to see, or lets you limit the
deformations. The default scale factor is 1.
Note that setting the scale factor to a value other than 1 can make the joints at
the flexible body appear to separate. This is because the motion of a point on a
flexible body is the sum of the deformation that has been scaled and a rigid
body motion that is not scaled.
In addition, if you set the scale to 0, Adams/Flex treats the flexible body as a
rigid body during animations.
Select to add any comments to help you manage and identify the flexible body.
See Comments.
Select to create a flexible body measure. Learn about creating Object Measures
E - I 283
Force Create Element Like Friction
284 Adams/View
Force Graphics Settings
Do the following:
Force Scale
Enter the amount by which you want to scale force (straight arrows)
graphics. The default scale is 1.0.
Torque Scale
Decimal Places
Always in Foreground
Always Wireframe Vectors Select if you want Adams/View to show the force graphics in wireframe
render mode even when you are rendering the view in shaded mode.
Note:
If you defined force graphics for any force elements in your model, but do not see the
associated arrows during animation, you should probably increase the appropriate scale
and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until the arrows of interest are visible.
Conversely, if you see force graphic arrows on the screen, but they are too large or not
completely visible, you should either zoom out, fit your view, or decrease the scale
factor and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until at least the arrows of interest
are completely visible.
E - I 285
Force Modify Element Like Beam
Do the following:
Adams Id
Comments
Enter any comments about the beam that might help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Ixx
Iyy/Izz
Enter the area moments of inertia about the neutral axes of the beam cross
sectional areas (y-y and z-z). These are sometimes referred to as the second
moment of area about a given axis. They are expressed as unit length to the
fourth power. For a solid circular section, Iyy=Izz=
. For thinwalled sections, open sections, and non-circular sections, you should
consult a handbook.
Enter the uniform area of the beam cross-section geometry. The centroidal
axis must be orthogonal to this cross section.
286 Adams/View
Force Modify Element Like Beam
Do the following:
Specify the correction factor (the shear area ratio) for shear deflection in the
y and z direction for Timoshenko beams. If you want to neglect the
deflection due to shear, enter zero in the text boxes.
For the y direction:
where:
Qy is the first moment of cross-sectional area to be sheared by a
where:
Qz is the first moment of cross-sectional area to be sheared by a
section are:
Solid rectangular - 6/5
Solid circular - 10/9
Thin wall hollow circular - 2
Note:
Young's Modulus
Shear Modulus
Beam Length
Enter the undeformed length of the beam along the x-axis of the J marker
on the reaction body.
E - I 287
Force Modify Element Like Beam
Do the following:
Select either:
Damping Ratio and enter a damping value to establish a ratio for
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to
right. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero
entries; that is, r1 through r21 each default to zero.
The damping matrix should be positive semidefinite. This ensures
that damping does not feed energy into the model. Adams/Solver
does not warn you if the matrix is not positive semidefinite.
288 Adams/View
Force Modify Element Like Beam
Do the following:
Specify the two markers between which to define a beam. The I marker is
on the action body and the J marker is on the reaction body. The J marker
establishes the direction of the force components.
By definition, the beam lies along the positive x-axis of the J marker.
Therefore, the I marker must have a positive x displacement with respect to
the J marker when viewed from the J marker. In its undeformed
configuration, the orientation of the I and the J markers must be the same.
When the x-axes of the markers defining a beam are not collinear, the beam
deflection and, consequently, the force corresponding to this deflection are
calculated. To minimize the effect of such misalignments, perform a static
equilibrium at the start of the simulation.
When the beam element angular deflections are small, the stiffness matrix
provides a meaningful description of the beam behavior. When the angular
deflections are large, they are not commutative; so the stiffness matrix that
produces the translational and rotational force components may not
correctly describe the beam behavior. Adams/Solver issues a warning
message if the beam translational displacements exceed 10 percent of the
undeformed length.
Specifies the theory to be used to define the force this element will apply.
By default the LINEAR theory is used. If the NONLINEAR option is used,
the full non linear Euler-Bernoulli theory is used. If the STRING option is
used, a simplified non linear theory is used. The simplified non linear
theory may speed up your simulations with little performance penalties.
E - I 289
Force Modify Element Like Field
Do the following:
Adams Id
Comments
Enter any comments about the field element that might help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
I marker Name/
J marker Name
Specify the two markers between which the force and torque are to be exerted.
Adams/View applies the component translational and rotational forces for a
field to the I marker and imposes reaction forces on the J marker.
Translation at
Preload/ Rotation at
Preload
Enter the preload translational and rotational force for the field element.
Translation at Preload to define three reference lengths. This is the
nominal (x0, y0, z0) position of the I marker with respect to the
J marker, resolved in the J marker coordinate system.
Rotation at Preload to define the reference rotational displacement of
the axes of the I marker with respect to the J marker, resolved in the
J marker axes (a0, b0, and c0) (specified in radians).
If the reference force is zero, then the preload is the same as the free length.
Entering preload values is optional and defaults to a six zero entry.
Define Using
Standard
Values/Define Using
Subroutine
appear in the dialog box as explained in the next rows of this table.
Define Using Subroutine and enter parameters to be passed to the
user-written subroutine FIESUB to define a nonlinear field. Enter up to
290 Adams/View
Force Modify Element Like Field
Do the following:
Force Preload/Torque Define three preload force components and three preload torque components
Preload
transferred by the field element when the I and J markers are
separated/misaligned by the values specified in the Translation at Preload and
Rotation at Preload text boxes.The terms are the force components along the x, y-, and z-axis of the J marker and the torque components about the x, y-, and
z-axis of the J marker, respectively. Entering values for Force Preload and
Torque Preload is optional and defaults to six zero entries.
Stiffness Matrix
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
Learn about units.
Tip:
A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
stiffness matrix.
E - I 291
Force Modify Element Like Field
Do the following:
Enter either a matrix of damping terms or a damping ratio if you want to
include damping coefficients in the calculation of the field forces as explained
below. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero entries.
To define a six-by-six matrix of viscous damping coefficients, select
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
To enter a damping ratio that defines the ratio of the damping matrix to
the stiffness matrix, select Damping Ratio and enter the value. If you
enter a damping ratio, Adams/Solver multiplies the stiffness matrix by
the ratio to obtain the damping matrix. Do not enter a ratio without also
entering a stiffness matrix.
Tip:
A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
damping matrix.
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
Specifies the theory to be used to define the force this element will apply. By
default the LINEAR theory is used. If the NONLINEAR option is used, the full
non linear Euler-Bernoulli theory is used. If the STRING option is used, a
simplified non linear theory is used. The simplified non linear theory may
speed up your simulations with little performance penalties.
292 Adams/View
Force Modify Element Like Friction
E - I 293
Forces
Forces
Displays tools for creating forces. Learn more about Forces.
Icon
Link
Applied Forces
Icon
Link
Special Forces
Single-Component Force tool
Create/Modify Contact
Create/Modify Modal
Force
Create/Modify Wheel
and Tire
Gravity
Flexible Connections
Bushing Tool
Torsion SpringTool
Field Element Tool
Translational Spring Damper Tool
Beam
294 Adams/View
Frustum Tool
Frustum Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Frustrum Tool
Creates a frustum, which is a cone, the top of which has been cut off. You create a frustum by drawing
its length. The Frustum tool makes the bottom radius 12.5% of the length and makes the top radius of the
frustum 50% of the radius of the base radius. Before drawing, you can also specify the frustum's length
and the radii of its bottom and top
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the frustum to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the frustum to ground.
Tip:
Length
Bottom Radius
If desired, select and enter the bottom radius for the frustum.
Top Radius
If desired, select and enter the top radius for the frustum.
E - I 295
Frustum Tool
Note:
Three hotpoints appear on a frustrum after you draw it. One controls the length of the
frustum, one controls its top radius, and the other controls the bottom radius. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
296 Adams/View
Function Builder
Function Builder
Tools Function Builder
Helps you create and modify functions and parameterize values for various entities. You can either work
in the Expression mode or the Run-time mode.
Expression Mode
E - I 297
Function Builder
Run-time Mode
298 Adams/View
Function Builder
For more information on Function Builder, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help.
Do the following:
Create/modify a function object You can type in a function or choose from the list of system supplied
functions.
Function Categories
Name
Load
Type
Select the type of value you want the function to return. Choose
from:
real
integer
array
string
object
location_orientation
Arguments
Assumed Values
E - I 299
Function Builder
Do the following:
Select a type object allowed in the object field. Choose from:
Markers
Parts
Design Points
Design Variables
Results Data
Measures
All Objects
Select if you want to get the name of a data field owned by the object
and insert it into your function definition.
Select if you want to insert the object name into your function
definition.
Plot
Plot Limits
Evaluate
300 Adams/View
Function Builder Plot Limits
When working in the Function Builder in Run-time mode, you can set limits for the horizontal axis
values. Adams/View plots the independent data on the horizontal axis.
For more information, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help.
Do the following:
Begin Value
End Value
E - I 301
Gain Block
Gain Block
Build Controls Toolkit Standard Control Blocks New/Modify
Gain blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions. You
specify the gain as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parameterize this constant with an
Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input
Gain
302 Adams/View
Gear Joint Tool
Creates a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the common
velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact.
Learn about:
Creating and Modifying Gears
About Gears
Equations for Gears
E - I 303
General Point Motion Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the motion connected to parts:
1 location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see About Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Feature
304 Adams/View
Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack
E - I 305
Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack
Icon
Construction or
Settings
Container
Link
Icon
Link
Link Tool
Arc Tool
Box Tool
Spline Tool
Cylinder Tool
Unite Tool
Sphere Tool
Intersect Tool
Frustum Tool
Cut Tool
Torus Tool
Split Tool
Extrusion Tool
Merge Tool
Revolution Tool
Chain Tool
Plate Tool
Fillet Tool
Point Tool
Chamfer Tool
Marker Tool
Hole Tool
Plane Tool
Boss Tool
Polyline Tool
Hollow Tool
Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change
depending on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when
you create a link, Adams/View lets you specify its width, length, and height
before creating it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set
regardless of how you move the mouse. You can also define design variables
or expressions for many values.
306 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Curve Arc
Allows you to control the size and location of an arc. You can modify a circle by following the same steps.
Learn about the Arc Tool.
Do the following:
Arc Name
Adams Id
Comments
Enter any comments about the geometry to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Center Marker
Enter values for the marker at the center of the arc or circle. The plane
of the arc is normal to the z-axis of the center marker.
Enter values for the extended angle measured positive (according to the
right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the center marker of an arc. The
angle starts at the positive x-axis of the center marker and extends the
arc.
Radius/Ref Radius By
Marker
E - I 307
Geometry Modify Curve Arc
Do the following:
Segment Count
Close
ending point.
Sector - Closes the arc so that it creates a pie-shaped arc.
No - Creates an open arc.
308 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Curve Polyline
Allows you to control the size and location of the polyline. Learn about the Polyline Tool.
Do the following:
Polyline Name
New Name
Relative To
Location/Path Curve Select either Location or Path Curve and then specify:
Locations to be used to define the polyline. By default, you supply
to display the
A geometry object whose path defines the polyline. You can select arcs,
Select if you want to create a closed polyline. If closed, the polyline can be filled
(shaded). The endpoints of the polyline do not need to be coincident for you to
close it; the two endpoints will be connected with a line segment.
If you do not select Close, you create a polyline that appears as a segmented
curve. Adams/View creates the polyline by connecting the locations you
specified in the Location text box together with straight line segments in the
order in which you specified them.
Select to add any comments about the polyline that you want to enter to help
you manage and identify it. See Comments.
Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.
E - I 309
Geometry Modify Feature Blend - Chamfer or Fillet
Allows you to control the radius of the chamfer or fillet. Learn more about:
Chamfer Tool
Fillet Tool
Do the following:
Enter the name of the chamfer or fillet to modify.
New Blend Name If you want, enter a new name for the chamfer or fillet.
Radius 1
Radius 2
Enter the ending radius of the fillet. You specify the end radius if you are creating
a variable blend fillet.
310 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Feature Hole
Do the following:
Hole Name
Center
Radius
Depth
E - I 311
Geometry Modify Feature Thinshell
Allows you to control the thickness of a hollowed shell. Learn about the Hollow Tool.
Do the following:
Name
New Name
Thickness
Specify the depth of the remaining shell after you hollow the object.
312 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Block
Allows you to control the corner marker used as the anchor point of a block (box). By controlling the
corner marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the block's location
and orientation.
Learn about the Box Tool.
Do the following:
Block Name
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the block that you want to enter to help you manage
and identify it. See Comments.
Corner Marker
Specify a marker used to define the anchor point for the block.
Diag Corner Coords Specify the location of the diagonal corner from the marker measured in the
coordinate system of the corner marker.
E - I 313
Geometry Modify Shape Cylinder
Allows you to control the center marker used as the anchor point of a cylinder. By controlling the center
marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the cylinder's location and
orientation.
Learn about the Cylinder Tool.
Do the following:
Cylinder Name
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the cylinder that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it. See Comments.
Cylinder Options
Center Marker
Specify the center marker that defines the center of base of the cylinder.
The length of the cylinder is oriented along the z-axis of the center marker.
Angle Extent
Length
Enter the length of the cylinder. Adams/View uses the value of length to
specify the z distance between the two circles. A positive value specifies a
cylinder along the positive z-axis of the center marker.
Radius/Ref Radius By
Marker
Specify the radius of circles at the top and bottom of the cylinder or a radius
marker. If you enter a radius marker, Adams/View calculates the radius of
the cylinder as the distance from the center marker z-axis to the radius
marker. Adams/View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you
later move this marker, the radius does not change.
314 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Cylinder
Do the following:
Enter the number of flat sides Adams/View draws on the side of the
cylinder. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations
Adams/View uses to determine a parts mass and inertia.
E - I 315
Geometry Modify Shape Ellipsoid (Spheres)
Allows you to control the center marker used as the anchor point of a ellipsoid (sphere). By controlling
the center marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the ellipsoid's
location and orientation.
Learn about the Sphere Tool.
Do the following:
Displays the name of the ellipsoid you are modifying.
New Ellipsoid Name If you want, enter a unique name for the ellipsoid.
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the ellipsoid that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it. See Comments.
Center Marker
Specify the center marker that defines the center of the ellipsoid.
X Scale
Y Scale
Z Scale
316 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Frustum
Do the following:
Frustum Name
Center Marker
Specify the marker at the center of the bottom of a frustum. Orient the center
marker so that its z-axis is normal to the bottom of the frustum and points
towards the top of the frustum.
Angle Extent
Length
Specify the height of the frustum. Adams/View uses the length value to
specify the z distance between the two circles. A positive value specifies a
frustum along the positive z-axis of the center marker.
Specify the number of flat sides Adams/View draws on the side of the
frustum. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations
Adams/View uses to determine a parts mass and inertia.
Top Radius
Specify the radius at the top of a frustum. The top is perpendicular to the
center marker z-axis.
Bottom Radius
Specify the radius at the bottom of the frustum. The bottom is perpendicular
to the center marker z-axis, and the center of the bottom is at the center
marker origin.
Segment Count for Ends Displays the number of segments Adams/View uses to draw the circles at
the ends of the frustum.
Select to add any comments about the frustum that you want to enter to help
you manage and identify it. See Comments.
Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.
E - I 317
Geometry Modify Shape Link
Allows you to precisely control the size, location, and shape of a Link. Learn about the Link Tool.
Do the following:
Link Name
Comments
Add any comments about the link that you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
I marker
Specify the marker at one end of the link. Adams/View calculates the length of
the link as the distance between the I marker and J maker.
J marker
Width
Specify the width of the link. The width of the link also controls the radius of the
semicircular ends (the radius is equal to one half of the links width).
Depth
318 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Plane
Allows you to control the location and orientation of planes and change the name of the planes.
Learn about the Plane Tool.
Do the following:
Plane Name
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the plane that you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Ref Marker Name Specify the reference marker used to locate and orient the plane.
X Minimum
Specify the location of one corner of the plane in coordinates relative to the
reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the lower left corner
of the plane. For example, the values of X Minimum = 10 and Y Minimum = 20,
place the lower left corner at 10,20 in the reference marker's coordinate system.
X Maximum
Specify the location of the opposite corner of the plane in coordinates relative to
the reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the upper right
corner of the plane.
Y Minimum
Specify the location of one corner of the plane in coordinates relative to the
reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the lower left corner
of the plane. For example, the values of X Minimum = 10 and Y Minimum = 20,
place the lower left corner at 10,20 in the reference marker's coordinate system.
Y Maximum
Specify the location of the opposite corner of the plane in coordinates relative to
the reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the upper right
corner of the plane.
E - I 319
Geometry Modify Shape Plate
Allows you to control the location and orientation of a plate and allows you to rename the plate.
Learn about the Plate Tool.
See an example of Plate.
Do the following:
Plate Name
Comments
Add any comments about the plate that you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Marker Name
Specify the markers used to define the vertices of the plate. The first marker listed
is the anchor point for the plate. It is the first point that you specified when you
created the plate.
Width
Enter the thickness of the plate measured along the z-axis of the corner marker.
Radius
Note:
To change the corner locations of a plate, modify the markers that define the corner
locations.
320 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Torus
Do the following:
Torus Name
Adams Id
Specify an integer to be used to identify this element in the Adams data file.
Comments
Add any comments about the torus that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it. See Comments.
Center Marker
Angle Extent
Major Radius
Minor Radius
Side Count for Perimeter Enter the number of circular cross-sections to create along the spine of the
torus. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations
Adams/View uses to determine a parts mass and inertia.
Segment Count
Enter the number of sides for each of the circular cross-sections of the torus.
E - I 321
Graphical Topology
Graphical Topology
Database Navigator Graphical Topology
Allows you to display a representation of the selected part and shows its connections to other parts. The
connections represent the joints or forces between the parts. Each time you select a different part in the
tree list of the Database Navigator, the graphical display changes to show the selected part at the center
of the display. If the object is inactive, the part appears dimmed.
Below is an example of graphical view topology.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
322 Adams/View
Gravity
Gravity
Settings Gravity
Build Forces Gravity Tool
You can specify the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of gravity. For each part with mass, the
gravitational force produces a point force at its center of mass.
When you turn on gravity, an icon appears in the middle of the Adams/View Main window. To turn off
the display of the gravity icon, see Displaying View Accessories.
Learn about setting gravity.
Do the following:
Gravity
E - I 323
Group Attributes
Group Attributes
Build Group Attributes
Do the following:
Group Name
Scale of Icons
Size of Icons
Specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View icons will appear in.
Visibility
Name Visibility
This parameter provides control over the visibility of the view name
displayed at the top center position of a given view.
Transparency
Lod
Color
Entity Scope
Active
When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is written to the data set as a
comment.
Dependents Active
Specifies whether children of the objects are to be acted upon in the same way
as the active parameter does.
Line Thickness
Line Type
This parameter allows the selection of the line type for a curve.
324 Adams/View
Group Create
Group Create
Build Group New ...
Lets you group several objects so that you can work on them as a single object. This is particularly helpful
for objects that make up a unit or subsystem of your model, such as a suspension system or a handle of
a latch. Once youve grouped the objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can
perform editing operations on them, such as move or copy them. You can also set up their activation and
deactivation status during simulations. (Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.)
When you create a group, you can specify the objects to be included or set up a filter to specify the objects
in the group. You can also enter an expression that sets whether or not the objects are active or deactive
during a simulation.
Learn about the procedures for Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
Do the following:
Group Name
Enter a name for the group of objects or accept the default name.
Comments
Add any comments about the group that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the group. See Comments.
Objects in Group
the type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter
Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only
coordinate system markers.
Type Filter
Expand Group
Expr Active
Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You
can enter an expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter
1 or 0. If you do not specify a value, Adams/View uses the activation status
you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands.
E - I 325
Group Modify
Group Modify
Build Group Modify ...
Lets you modify an exisitng group. A group is particularly helpful for objects that make up a unit or
subsystem of your model, such as a suspension system or a handle of a latch. Once youve grouped the
objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can perform editing operations on them,
such as move or copy them. You can also set up their activation and deactivation status during
simulations. (Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.)
When you create a group, you can specify the objects to be included or set up a filter to specify the objects
in the group. You can also enter an expression that sets whether or not the objects are active or deactive
during a simulation.
Learn about the procedures for Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
Do the following:
Group Name
Comments
Add any comments about the group that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the group. See Comments.
Objects in Group
the type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter
Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only
coordinate system markers.
Type Filter
Expand Group
Expr Active
Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You
can enter an expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter
1 or 0. If you do not specify a value, Adams/View uses the activation status
you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands.
326 Adams/View
Hole Tool
Hole Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Hole Tool
As you create a hole, you can specify its radius and depth.
Note:
You cannot specify the radius and depth of a hole so that it splits the current geometry into
two separate geometries.
Do the following:
Radius
Depth
E - I 327
Hollow Tool
Hollow Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Hollow Tool
Hollows out one or more faces of a solid object to create a shell. As you hollow an object, you can specify
the thickness of the remaining shell and the faces to be hollowed. You can also specify that Adams/View
add material to the outside of the object. In this case, Adams/View uses the original object as a mold.
Adams/View adds material of the specified thickness to the original object and then takes the original
object away, leaving a shell.
Example of Hollowed Boxes.
Note:
You can hollow any object that has a face. You cannot hollow spheres, revolutions, or
Construction geometry
Do the following:
Thickness
Specify the thickness of the remaining shell after you hollow the object.
Inside
Clear if you want to add the shell to the outside of the object.
328 Adams/View
Hooke/Universal Joint Tool
Creates a hooke/universal joint that allows the rotation of one rigid body to be transferred to the rotation
of another rigid body.
This joint is particularly useful when transferring rotational motion around corners, when you need to
simulate the non-constant velocity of a physical universal joint, or when transferring rotational motion
between two connected shafts that are permitted to bend at the connection point (such as the drive shaft
on an automobile).
The location point of the universal joint represents the connection point of the two parts. For a hooke
joint, two shaft axes leading to the cross bars identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted
to rotate with respect to each other. Note that Adams/View uses rotational axes that are parallel to the
rotational axes you identify but that pass through the location point for the hooke joint. For a universal
joint, the cross bars identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted to rotate with respect to
each other.
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
E - I 329
Hooke/Universal Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints
to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Geometry Feature
330 Adams/View
Hot Point Snapping Increments
E - I 331
Icon Settings Dialog Box
Sets up how you want Screen icons displayed for the entire Modeling database or a particular type of
object, such as all parts or joints. By default, all objects inherit the screen icon display options that you
specify for the modeling database. You can set screen icon options for the following types of objects:
Curve-curves
Couplers
Data elements
Equations (System elements)
Forces
Gears
Joints
Markers (Note that markers belong to parts and, therefore, by default, inherit screen icon display
Do the following:
Choose one of the following to select whether or not you want to turn on screen
icons:
No Change - Select No Change to not change the current settings.
On - Turns on all icons regardless of how you set the icon display for
Enter the size you want for the screen icons. Note that any changes you make to
the size of icons for individual objects or types of objects take precedence over
this size setting.
Select the type of object for which you want to set the screen icon options
332 Adams/View
Icon Settings Dialog Box
Do the following:
Select whether or not you want to turn on screen icons for the selected object
type. You can select:
On - Turns on the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.
Off - Turns off the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.
Remember, however, that turning on the display of screen icons for the
entire database overrides this setting.
Inherit - Lets the object type simply inherit the display settings from its
Name Visibility
Select whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type
displayed in the view. Refer to Visibility option above for choices.
Reset
E - I 333
Import - Adams/Solver Analysis Files
Imports Adams/Solver analysis files, which are a set of output files that Adams/Solver generates during
a single Simulation. The files include:
Graphics
Request
Results
You can import multiple files if you associate and store the files with a model. Adams/View reads and
creates all analyses under the specified model. If you do not provide a model name, Adams/View reads
each analysis into its own model. For request files, when you specify multiple files, the Request IDs
button only displays the requests from the first file listed. The list of IDs will, however, be applied to all
files.
If you select to associate the files with a particular simulation, you can only import one set of output files
generated from the same Adams/Solver simulation. Adams/View uses the time-date stamp placed at the
beginning of each output file to determine if the files were generated by the same simulation run.
If you have very large request files that you want to import, Adams/View lets you read in only a subset
of the request file to conserve memory use. You can specify to read in only the request IDs in which you
are interested and skip time steps. Note that this is only available when reading in a single request file,
not when reading in an entire set of analysis files.
Note:
Importing an entire set of analysis files works even if you have only one of the three files
included in the analysis set as explained below.
If Adams/View cannot find any of the three files, it issues a message. The most common
reasons that Adams/View cannot find one or more of the files are that the path to the files
is incorrect or you do not have permission to read the file. You can either:
Import the files again using the correct path name.
Move the files into the directory from which you are running Adams/View and
check the file permission. Then, import the files again. You do not need to specify
the file locations.
334 Adams/View
Import - Adams/Solver Analysis Files
Do the following:
To import sets of analysis files, select Adams/Solver Analysis Files.
To import individual analysis files one at a time, select Graphics, Request,
or Results.
Note:
File(s) to Read
When you import only a graphics file, you can select to display the
graphics and choose to store the data on your disk drive and not in the
Adams Modeling database. Then when Adams/View or
Adams/PostProcessor animates the model, it references the data on
disk. By saving the data on disk and not in the Adams database you
can save substantial amounts of memory, especially if the files are
large (containing 20,000 output steps or more). Note that storing the
data on disk results in slightly longer animation time.
Enter the base name of the file or set of files. You do not need to enter their
extension.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Model/Analysis
Enter either the model or analysis name under which you want to store the
analysis files in the modeling database. You can enter multiple files if you select
to store them under a model.
View
(Adams/PostProcessor only)
Enter the viewport in which to display the data.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Display Model
After Completion
Select if you want to avoid reading the entire contents of the graphics, request,
or results data (XML only) into the database. Adams/View references the data
only when needed for animations or xy plotting. Storing the data on disk reduces
the memory footprint and improves performance for very large simulations, for
example, those containing durability results. Learn more about storing results
files in XML format with Results (.res) Options dialog box help.
If you selected to import a request file, the following two options appear:
Request IDs
Enter the IDs of the requests in which you are interested and want read into the
Adams/View database. Select the More tool
to select from a list of all the
requests and their IDs in the specified request file.
Enter whether or not to skip time steps by specifying a pattern of time steps to
skip. If you have a large request file with unnecessarily fine time resolution, this
can significantly reduce the amount of memory used to store the data. For
example, enter 1 to have Adams/View store only the following time steps in the
database: 1st, 3rd, 5th, and so on. Enter 2 to store only the 1st, 4th, 7th, and so
on.
E - I 335
Import - Adams/Solver Dataset
Note:
If Adams/View encounters special characters in the file, such as <CTRL m>, it cancels the
operation. Special characters can appear in files that have been transferred between
different computer systems (for example, from Windows NT to Linux). If Adams/View
cancels the operation, edit the file to remove the special characters and import the file into
Adams/View again.
Do the following:
File Type
File to Read
Enter the name of the dataset that you want to import. You do not
need to enter the file extension .adm, since Adams/View assumes
that this is the file extension.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Model to Create
Enter the name of the model you want to create from the dataset.
Set the default units for the model. For more information, see Units
Dialog Box.
Display Model Upon Completion Display the final results of the import.
336 Adams/View
Import - Adams/Solver Script
Imports an Adams/Solver script file (*.acf) into Adams/View. After importing Adams/View creates a
Simulation Script in the database.
Do the following:
File Type
File to Read
Enter the name of the solver script file that you want to import. You do not
need to enter the file extension .acf, since Adams/View assumes that this is
the file extension.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Simulation Script Name A new or an existing Simulation Script. If an existing script is specified, then
the import operation will modify the script with the commands from the
specified file.
E - I 337
Import - Adams/View Command Files
Imports a command file into Adams/View so that Adams/View executes the commands stored in the
command file.
You can also use Tools Read Command File to import a command file, and set the
options using Settings Command File.
Tip:
Learn about:
Sources of Command Files
Command File Format
Ensuring Upward Compatibility of Command Files
Reading Command Files
Do the following:
File Type
File to Read
Enter the name of the command file that you want to import. You
do not need to enter the file extension .cmd since Adams/View
assumes that it is the file extension.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Echo Commands
Update Screen
Display Model Upon Completion Display the final results of the import.
On Error
338 Adams/View
Import - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA
When you import CAD geometry, Adams reads the CAD file and converts the geometry into a set of
Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce the
need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically
view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.
Be sure that the model into which you want to import the geometry is currently open and displayed in
Adams. You can associate the geometry that you import with an existing part or create a new part with
which to associate it.
E - I 339
Import - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA
Do the following:
File Type
File to Read
Part Name
Enter the name of the part with which you want to associate the imported geometry.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Model Name
Enter the name of the model with which you want to import the geometry. If the
input data is an assembly, then individual parts in the assembly will be translated
as separate parts under the Adams model.
Level
Enter the level or levels to be translated in the CAD file for IGES, DXF, and DWG
files. Levels let you associate geometry into a group. These groups can be
manipulated as a single entity for purposes of visibility and color. The CAD
program that generated the CAD file defines the levels and are labeled with
integers greater than or equal to 0. Levels are typically used to organize data for
viewing and are similar to layers. If you do not specify the levels you want
translated, Adams/Exchange reads all levels.
You can specify a single level or a range of levels. Separate the range with a comma
(,). For example, enter 10, 15 to translate levels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15.
Scale
Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in
Adams/Exchange. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in
Adams/Exchange will be the same size as the geometry in the CAD file. A scale
factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0
increases the size of the geometry.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams translates a cylinder of
length 2 meters and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of
.25 meters. Adams also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate
system specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the
cylinder was located at 3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is
translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not effected by scale value.
340 Adams/View
Import - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA
Do the following:
Select to translate entities that are blanked (made not visible). Adams/Exchange
translates the blanked entities and makes them invisible. If you do not select
Blanked Entities, Adams does not translate the blanked entities.
Blanked entities are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of
another geometric entity. For example, a line can be used as the center of rotation
of another line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line and the sweep line
rotated about the center line are both blanked because they are temporary entities
used in the construction of the cylinder.
Once you translate blanked entities to Adams, there is no distinction between
construction entities and other geometry. You can change the visibility of the
entities.
Location
Specify the translational position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be
located, relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention
for entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate
System.
Note:
Orientation
This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part
and not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
Specify the angular position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be oriented
relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
Adams/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate
system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed
313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles.Learn
about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Note:
Relative To
This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part
and not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
Enter the coordinate system relative to which the translated geometry will be
defined. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes
are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate
system, part, or model.
Note:
This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part
and not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
E - I 341
Import - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, Inventor, STEP, IGES, Acis, ProE, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, VDA
Do the following:
Set to import all the geometry as one shell. If you do not select Consolidate To
Shells, Adams imports the geometry as individual entities. We recommend that you
select Consolidate To Shells to receive the best animation results.
Note:
This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part
and not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
Display
Summary
Select to write a verbose log file to the disk. A message will be displayed indicating
the log file to which the translation operation details have been written.
Translation
Options
Click on this button to invoke the Manage Geometry Translation Options dialog
box for the relevant geometry and translation operation (read or write). The dialog
box would be pre-filled with the option name, short description of what the option
is for and the default value.
Upon changing the desired option values, click on the 'Done' button. The
translation options so set will be used in the ensuing translation operation.
Note:
The translation via 'Adams CAD Translators' is applicable for STEP and IGES only if
MSC_GEOM_TRANSLATE_INTEROP is set to an integral value of 1.
342 Adams/View
Import - DAC or RPC III
You can import test data in DAC or RPC III format. The steps involved in importing the data are
essentially the same for both formats; however, it is important to remember that RPC III format supports
multiple channels per file while DAC format only has one channel per file.
Adams/View creates a DAC_FILE or RPC_FILE object below Root in the database after you
successfully import these files. It only stores information about the imported file from the file header. It
does not store time history data in the database. Adams/View also creates Result_Set_Component
placeholders below the file object for each RPC III data channel or DAC file.
Do the following:
File Type
File to Read
Enter the name of the file or files that you want to import. With DAC
files, you may want to select multiple files because each file has only
one result set. You can use Shift+click or Ctrl+click multiple selection
techniques.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
E - I 343
Import - Parasolid
Import - Parasolid
File Import Parasolid
Do the following:
File Type
Set to Parasolid.
File to Read
File Type
Model Name/Part Name Select whether or not you want to store the geometry under a model or part
name in the Modeling database and enter the name of the object in the text
box.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
344 Adams/View
Import - Shell
Import - Shell
File Import Shell
Note:
Do the following:
Enter the name of the file that you want to import.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Shell Name
Enter the name with which you want to associate the imported shell geometry.
Reference Marker Enter the name of the marker to which the shell is paired. During animations, the
shell geometry moves with the marker.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Wireframe Only
E - I 345
Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG
When you import CAD geometry, Adams/Exchange reads the CAD file and converts the geometry into
a set of Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce
the need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically
view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.
Be sure that the model into which you want to import the geometry is currently open and displayed in
Adams. You can associate the geometry that you import with an existing part or create a new part with
which to associate it.
Do the following:
File Type
File to Read
Part Name
Enter the name of the part with which you want to associate the imported
geometry. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Tolerance
Enter the tolerance for the geometry. The tolerance value is the measure of the
midpoint chordal distance from the approximated curve/surface to the true
curve/surface:
Schematic of the Tolerance Value
Be careful when specifying the tolerance. You should have advanced knowledge
of the units and size of the geometry in the CAD file before setting the tolerance.
If you do not know the size of the geometry in the file, Adams/Exchange may
translate the geometry so it is too coarse, or too fine. A tolerance that is too fine
can potentially cause Adams/Exchange to use excessive computing power and
memory.
The tolerance reported in the log file is the tolerance of the data defined in the
CAD file. This is the maximum tolerance available in the CAD file and is usually
too fine for efficient translation to Adams/View. We recommend, therefore, that
you try a tolerance several orders of magnitude greater then the tolerance specified
in the CAD file.
346 Adams/View
Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG
Do the following:
Enter the level or levels to be translated in the CAD file for IGES, DXF, and DWG
files. Levels let you associate geometry into a group. These groups can be
manipulated as a single entity for purposes of visibility and color. The CAD
program that generated the CAD file defines the levels and are labeled with
integers greater than or equal to 0. Levels are typically used to organize data for
viewing and are similar to layers. If you do not specify the levels you want
translated, Adams/Exchange reads all levels.
You can specify a single level or a range of levels. Separate the range with a
comma (,). For example, enter 10, 15 to translate levels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15.
Scale
Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in
Adams/Exchange. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in
Adams/Exchange will be the same size as the geometry in the CAD file. A scale
factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0
increases the size of the geometry.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams/Exchange translates a
cylinder of length 2 meters and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and
diameter of .25 meters. Adams/Exchange also scales the distance from the
geometry to the coordinate system specified in the Relative To text box according
to the scale value. If the cylinder was located at 3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be
located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry
is not effected by scale value.
Create
Select either:
Polygons to represent surfaces as polygons. Selecting Polygons allows for the
Select to translate entities that are blanked (made not visible). Adams/Exchange
translates the blanked entities and makes them invisible. If you do not select
Blanked Entities, Adams/Exchange does not translate the blanked entities.
Blanked entities are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of
another geometric entity. For example, a line can be used as the center of rotation
of another line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line and the sweep line
rotated about the center line are both blanked because they are temporary entities
used in the construction of the cylinder.
Once you translate blanked entities to Adams, there is no distinction between
construction entities and other geometry. You can change the visibility of the
entities.
E - I 347
Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG
Do the following:
Specify the translational position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be
located, relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention
for entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate
System.
Orientation
Specify the angular position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be oriented
relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
Adams/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate
system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed
313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles. Learn
about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Relative To
Enter the coordinate system relative to which the translated geometry will be
defined. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes
are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate
system, part, or model.
Mesh Density
Consolidate To
Shells
Set to import all the geometry as one shell. If you do not select Consolidate To
Shells, Adams/Exchange imports the geometry as individual entities. We
recommend that you select Consolidate To Shells to receive the best animation
results.
Display
Summary
348 Adams/View
Import - Stereolithography and Render Files
You can import both Stereolithography (SLA) and render geometry into Adams. As you import the SLA
and render geometry, you associate the geometry with an existing part or you create a new part with
which to associate it.
Importing your geometry as SLA or render geometry is more reliable than using other CAD formats, such
as IGES or STEP, and the file formats are very simple. There are, however, the following disadvantages:
The files are much larger than IGES and DXF files.
Because the surfaces have been represented as polygons, you cannot change the accuracy of the
surface representations in Adams/View. You must specify the accuracy when you create the files
in your CAD program.
Note:
Only ASCII .stl files (Stereolithography) are supported. Binary .stl files are not currently
supported.
Do the following:
File Type
File to Read
Part Name
Enter the name of the part with which you want to associate the imported geometry.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Scale
Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in
Adams. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in Adams will
be the same size as the geometry in the SLA or render file. A scale factor less than
1.0 reduces the size of the geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases
the size of the geometry.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams translates a cylinder of
length 2 meters and diameter .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25
meters. Adams also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate system
specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the cylinder
was located at 3, 2, 0 in the imported file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is
translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not affected by scale value.
E - I 349
Import - Stereolithography and Render Files
Do the following:
Specify the translational position where the geometry in the file is to be located
relative to the Adams/View part coordinate system. These coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention
for entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate
System.
Orientation
Specify the angular position where the geometry in the file is to be oriented relative
to the Adams/View part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
Adams/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate
system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed
313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles.Learn
about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Relative To
Enter the coordinate system to which the translated geometry will be defined
relative to. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text
boxes are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a
coordinate system, part, or model.
350 Adams/View
Import - Test Data
You can import test data, such as the results of hardware prototype testing, calculations, or Simulations
performed by other software or earlier sessions. When you import test data, you can compare it with
Adams simulation results or use the data in the definition of your model. For example, you might want
to import the results from physical tests of a mechanical system and compare them to the results of
simulations in Adams of the same mechanical system to evaluate the accuracy of a model or to help you
improve your model.
Learn about Test Data Format.
Do the following:
File Type
File to Read
Enter the name of the file that you want to import. Tips on Entering File
Names in Text Boxes.
Create Splines/
Create Measures
For measures only, specify which column in the data file contains the xaxis data. Enter the column number. Adams uses all other columns as the
y-axis data.
Independent Column Index For splines only, enter the column number to specify which column in the
file to use for the independent data (X parameter) in the Adams spline.
The columns are numbered sequentially from left to right starting with 1,
2, 3, and so on.
If you specify an independent data index for splines, Adams does not
create a spline for the column of the file with that index. Instead, that
column of data is used as the x data for all splines. If you do not include
an independent column index, then the series of numbers 1, 2, 3, and so
on is used for the x data of all splines.
E - I 351
Import - Test Data
Do the following:
Specify the unit category to be applied to the dependent data for the
spline. You can provide a unit category for each dependent column in the
file.
Once Adams assigns the units to the spline, it performs automatic unit
conversions based on the current default units specified (Settings
Units). For example, if you import test data and assign the unit category
of length, and then you change the length unit from millimeter to meter,
Adams/View automatically converts the test data by 0.001.
Note that you should take care to ensure the current units in Adams are
set to the appropriate units for the data in the file before importing the file.
If the Adams default units are millimeter, and you are importing data in
inches, the data in the file will be interpreted as millimeters.
The units field is optional. If you omit it, Adams assigns no_units to the
imported data, and performs no automatic unit conversion.
Model Name/
Analysis Name
Specify the name of the model or, for measures, the name of the analysis
in which you want to store the data. Select:
Model Name and then enter the name of the model in the text box
box next to the pull-down menu. You can only store measures under
simulation results. (Not available if you are importing the data as a
spline.)
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Names in File
Adams uses the column header text as the names of each spline.
If there are no textual column headers, do not select Names in File.
352 Adams/View
Import - Wavefront Files
Lets you import Wavefront geometry (.obj) files to define polygon vertices and connectivity for all
Adams graphics, except deformable geometry (springdampers, force/torque vectors, and multi-part
outlines). When you import a Wavefront .obj file, Adams only interprets vertex, face, and group
information. It ignores smoothing groups, textures, and material properties.
You can associate the imported geometry with an entire model, single part, or marker. Each option is
explained below:
Entire model - If you associate the contents of a Wavefront .obj with an entire model, Adams
creates a new part for each unique group name in the .obj file.
Single part - If you associate the contents of a Wavefront .obj with a single Adams part, Adams
creates a separate shell graphic object for each occurrence of a group in the .obj file.
Marker - If you associate the contents of a Wavefront .obj with a marker, Adams creates a
separate shell graphic object for each occurrence of a group in the .obj file. These shells become
the children of the part to which the marker belongs. The selected marker is the reference marker
for the shells.
Learn about Export - Wavefront.
Do the following:
File Type
Set to Wavefront.
File to Read
Enter the name of the Wavefront .obj file that you want to import.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
E - I 353
Import - Wavefront Files
Do the following:
Set to whether you want to associate the geometry with a part or a model, and then
enter the name of the part or model in the text box located next to the pull-down
menu:
Model Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a model,
Adams/View creates a new part for each unique group name that appears in the
file. If the same group name appears more than once, Adams/View adds a
separate shell geometric entity to the part with the same name as the group. It
assigns names to the shell using the convention SHLx, where x is a unique
integer.
Part Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a single part,
Adams/View creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It
assigns names to the shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a
unique integer.
Marker Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a marker,
Adams/View creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It
assigns names to the shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a
unique integer.
The parts Adams/View creates are massless and editing their properties and then
attaching them to your model could be cumbersome. Therefore, we suggest you
use the Part Name option. See also Tips on Importing Wavefront Files.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Scale Factor
Enter the amount you want to scale the geometry in the Wavefront .obj file.
Adams/View scales the geometry uniformly in the x, y, and z directions.
Geometry Placed Set to define whether the coordinates in the Wavefront file are to be interpreted as
relative to the part (relative_to_part) or relative to ground (relative_to_ground). By
default, Adams/View writes Wavefront files with the coordinates relative to the
part.
Set Read Only
Set if you want all shells that are created as a result of importing a WaveFront file
to be tagged as read only. If you select read-only, Adams/View does not export the
read-only shells, which protects your shell files from being overwritten. You
cannot remove the read-only setting once Adams/View creates the shells.
354 Adams/View
Impose Motion(s)
Impose Motion(s)
Right-click general motion Modify
Lets you modify a general Point Motion. It displays a set of options for each of the motion's six Degrees
of freedom (DOF). It displays a pull-down menu next to a DOF if it is free and can have motion applied
to it, and displays the label fixed if the DOF is constrained and cannot move.
Learn more:
About Motion
Modifying General Point Motion
Do the following:
Name
Moving Point
Change the marker that defines the location of the motion on the parts. Learn
About Point Motion. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Reference Point
Change the marker that defines the orientation of the motion on the parts.
Type
F(time)
Enter the following in the F(time) text boxes. The text boxes that appear
depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in
radians.)
Function expression
Parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the
More tool
to display the Function Builder.
Disp. IC and Velo. IC Enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The text boxes that
appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
E - I 355
Information
Information
Database Navigator Information
Allows you to view information about the selected object. This lists the database fields for the selected
object.
Learn Viewing Object Information Through Database Navigator.
The option:
Save to File
356 Adams/View
Information Window
Information Window
Tools Model Topology Map/Model Verify or Right-click on a part Info
Adams/View uses the Information window to display many different types of information about your
model, simulation, or motion data. In addition to just viewing information about your model, you can
perform a variety of operations in the Information window.
The information includes:
Topology on the different objects in your model
Object information, such as information about a part or a view
Model verification results
Measurements from one coordinate system marker to another
Result set component information
View attributes
Results from a system command you run using the Tools System Command
Do the following:
Apply
Executes the command but leaves the dialog box open so you can execute the
command again.
Parent
Children
Modify
Select to display the modify dialog box for the object displayed in the text box at
the top of the Information window.
Verbose
Select if you want to display more information about the object such as children of
the object, its geometry, whether or not commands are associated with it, and its
attributes like color and visibility.
Clear
Save to File
E - I 357
Initial Conditions Tool
Performs an initial conditions simulation to check for any inconsistencies in your model. An initial
conditions simulation tries to reconcile any positioning inconsistencies that exist in your model at its
design configuration and make it suitable for performing a nonlinear or linear simulation. Most
importantly, the initial conditions simulation tries to ensure that all joint connections are defined properly.
For example, for a revolute joint to be defined properly, the origins of the Markers that define the joint
must be coincident throughout a simulation. If the markers are not coincident, the joint is broken and
needs to be repaired. In this example, the initial conditions simulation helps repair the broken revolute
joint by moving the origins of the two markers until they are coincident
You can also use the initial conditions simulation if you are creating parts in exploded view. Exploded
view is simply creating the individual parts separately and then assembling them together into a model.
You might find this convenient if you have several complicated parts that you want to create individually
without seeing how they work together until much later. Adams/View provides options for specifying
that you are creating your model in exploded view as you create constraints.
After selecting the Initial Conditions tool, Adams/View tells you when it has assembled your model
properly. You can revert back to your original design configuration or you can save your assembled
model as the new design configuration for your model.
Learn about Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.
358 Adams/View
Inline Joint Tool
Constrains one part so that it can only move along a straight line defined on a second part as shown below.
In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates
the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.
The location of the inline joint on the first part must remain on the z-axis of the second part.
Learn about Creating Joint Primitives.
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints
to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
E - I 359
Inplane Joint Tool
Constrains one part so that it can only move in a plane of a second part as shown below. In the figure, the
solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates the second part
that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.
The origin of the inplane joint on the first part must remain in the xy plane of the second part.
360 Adams/View
Inplane Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints
to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
E - I 361
Input-Signal Function Block
Input function blocks are needed wherever a control or filter block does not receive its input from another
control or filter block. This includes external time functions that need to be passed into a block, as well
as measures of your model that represent error signals to pass into a block.
An input function block takes any valid Adams/Solver (run-time) expression as its input. The input
function block is a valid controls block to reference as the input to any other controls block.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Function
Enter the function expression that defines the function block. Select the More
button to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See Function
Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.
Check the inputs to the function block.
362 Adams/View
Integrator Block
Integrator Block
Build Controls Toolkit Standard Control Blocks New/Modify
Integrator filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer
functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parameterize
this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input
Initial Condition
E - I 363
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Display tools for controlling Simulation. The dialog box contains a complete set of simulation controls,
while the Simulation container contains only a subset of the most commonly used simulation controls.
Simulation Container
Learn about:
Simulation Basics
Types of Simulations
364 Adams/View
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Icon
Description
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify
your model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.
You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to
continue simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation
and continue.
Shortcut: Double-click the Select tool.
Stops any further processing, and the modeling objects appear in the
positions that Adams/Solver last successfully calculated.
Starts the Simulation.
model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the
animation, Adams/View animates the model up to the last simulation
step and leaves your model there.
If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select
E - I 365
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Icon
Sim. Type
Description
Sets the type of Simulation:
Default
Dynamic simulation
Kinematic simulation
Static equilibrium
End Time/
Duration/Forever
Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how
you want it defined. You can select:
End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want
simulation to run.
Forever - Adams/View continues simulating until you stop the
Set the frequency with which Adams/View outputs data during your
simulation. You can specify:
Steps - Represents the total number of times you want
No Debug/Eprint/Table
Select either:
No Debug - Display no debugging information.
Eprint
Table
More button
Render
366 Adams/View
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Icon
Icons
Description
By default, Adams/View turns off all Screen icons during animations to
speed up the animation.
To turn on and off icons:
On the Main toolbox, select the Icons button.
On the Animation Controls dialog box, select Icons.
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration before you run the
Simulation.
Initial Conditions Tool
Allows the user to grab a part and drag it while the C++ Solver honors all
of the model's constraints. Useful for quickly verifying a model's behavior.
Displays the Compute Linear Modes dialog box.
Displays the Perform Vibration Analysis dialog box. Only available when
you have Adams/Vibration. For more information, see the Adams/Vibration
help.
See Linear Modes.
Displays the Compute and Export Linear States dialog box letting you
generate a state-space matrix representation of your mechanical system.
Displays the Adams2Nastran dialog box allowing the export of a linearized
NASTRAN model from Adams.
Update Graphics Display Clear the selection to never have your model updated during the simulation.
Select this when you are sure that your simulation will run to completion
without difficulty, and you want to maximize the efficiency of the
simulation.
Learn about setting more options for simulation display with Solver
Settings - Display dialog box help.
Interactive/Scripted
E - I 367
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Icon
Description
Save/Delete Simulation Results
Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can
Displays Adams/PostProcessor.
Simulation Settings...
Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the
Simulation performed.
368 Adams/View
Intersect Tool
Intersect Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Intersect Tool
Creates a single part that is made up of only the intersecting geometries of two solids. It merges the
second part that you select with the geometry of the first part that you select and forms one rigid body
from the two geometries.
Learn about Creating One Part from the Intersection of Two Solids.
J - O 369
Intersect Tool
J-O
370 Adams/View
Joint Initial Conditions
Sets initial conditions for revolute, translational, and cylindrical joints, including translational and
rotational displacement and velocity. If you specify initial conditions, Adams/View uses them as the
initial displacement velocity of the part during an Initial conditions simulation regardless of any other
forces acting on the part.
Some options in the dialog box are not available (ghosted) depending on the type of joint for which you
are setting initial conditions.
Learn more about initial conditions for joints.
Do the following:
Trans. Displ.
Trans. Velo.
Rot. Displ.
Rot. Velo.
Note:
J - O 371
Joint Motion
Joint Motion
Right-click joint motion Modify
Do the following:
Name
Joint
Change the joint to which the motion is applied. The Joint Type text box
automatically updates to the selected type of joint.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Joint Type
Direction
Set to the desired motion direction (rotational or translational). You can select
only translational motion for a translational or cylindrical joint. You can select
only rotational motion for a revolute or cylindrical joint.
Define Using
Enter how you want to define the motion. Select Function to define using a
numerical value or Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.
Function
If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following in the
Function (time) text box that appears:
Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in
radians.)
Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the
More button
to display the Function Builder.
Tip:
Parameters and ID
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine MOTSUB.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
372 Adams/View
Joint Motion
Do the following:
Type
Displacement IC and
Velocity IC
Enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The text boxes that
appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
J - O 373
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks
Displays tools for creating joints. The palette contains the entire library of joints while the tool stacks on
the Main toolbox contain only subsets of the most commonly used joints.
Learn about Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes. Also learn about:
Types of Motion
374 Adams/View
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks
Overview of Constraints
J - O 375
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks
Joint Toolstack
Motion Toolstack
376 Adams/View
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks
Icon
Link
Icon
Link
Construction
or Settings
Container
Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending
on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link,
Adams/View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it.
Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move
the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
J - O 377
Lead-Lag Filter Block
Lead-lag filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer
functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parameterize
this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input
Low Pass
Constant
Lag constant
378 Adams/View
Lighting Settings
Lighting Settings
Settings Lighting Settings
Icon
Description
Intensity
Ambient
Angle
Slide to set how far from the center line the light source is. May not be appropriate
for all light sources, such as front.
Reflections
Two-Sided
J - O 379
Lighting Settings
Icon
Description
Set from upper left corner.
380 Adams/View
Lighting Settings
Icon
Description
Set from upper right corner
J - O 381
Lighting Settings
Icon
Description
Set from right side
382 Adams/View
Lighting Settings
Icon
Description
Set from bottom
J - O 383
Linear Modes Controls
Allows you to view your model oscillating at one of its natural frequencies. It cycles through the model
deformation starting from the operating point of the requested natural frequency of the eigensolution.
You can also see the effect of the damping on the model and display a table and plot of modes and
frequencies.
Learn about Animating Natural Frequencies.
Do the following:
Eigen
View
Mode Number/Frequency Select the mode to be used to calculate the deformation of the model. Set
to either:
Mode - Enter the number of the mode to be used
Frequency - Enter the frequency of the mode
Number of Cycles
384 Adams/View
Linear Modes Controls
Do the following:
Select if you want to show the path, or trail, of parts from one frame to
another.
Showing the trail is useful in showing the relationship of the model parts
between frames but often obscures the view of the motion.
Show undeformed
Show icons
Undef. Color
Max. Translation
Enter a value to scale mode shape so that translations are smaller than it.
Max. Rotation
Enter a value to scale mode shape so that rotations are smaller than it.
Table
Plot
J - O 385
Linear Modes Eigenvalue Plot
Displays the plot of eigenvalues and allows you to save or delete the plot.
Learn about Animating Natural Frequencies.
Do the following:
Delete Plot
Save Plot
Name
Only available if you selected Save Plot. Enter a name for the plot you want to
save.
386 Adams/View
Link Tool
Link Tool
Buid Bodies/Geometry Link Tool
Creates a link by drawing a line indicating the links length. By default, the Link tool creates the link with
a width that is 10% of the indicated length and a depth that is 5% of the length. The radius of the ends of
the link is equal to half the width. Before drawing, you can also define the length, width, and depth of the
link.
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the link to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the link to ground.
Tip:
Length
Width
Depth
Note:
Two hotpoints appear after you draw the link: one hotpoint lets you modify the length of
the link and the other hotpoint lets you modify the depth, width, and height. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
J - O 387
Location Table
Location Table
Polyline, Spline, Extrusion, Revolution Modify dialog box More button
Lets you view the points in polylines, splines, extrusions, and revolutions and edit them. You can also
save the location information to a file or read in location information from a file.
Learn more:
Displaying the Location Table
Working in the Location Table
Reading and Writing Location Information
For general information on using tables in Adams/View, see Using Tables to Enter Values.
388 Adams/View
LocationEvent
LocationEvent
When Adams/View asks you for a location, right-click
Lets you enter location coordinates to precisely set the location of an object, such as a design point or a
force. You can enter the location relative to the origin of the Working grid, the global coordinate system,
or any other object on the screen.
Learn about:
Entering Precise Location Coordinates
Selecting Objects from a Crowd
Do the following:
Upper box (no title) Enter the coordinates at which to place the object. By default, displays the
current coordinates of the cursor.
Pull-down menu
Select the element (working grid, global coordinate system, or modeling object)
to which the coordinates are relative. By default, the coordinates are relative to
the working grid.
Lower box (no title) In the lower box, enter the object to which the coordinates are relative. You only
need to enter an object if you selected that the coordinates are relative to an
object.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
J - O 389
Low-Pass Filter Block
Low-pass filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer
functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parametrize
this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input
Low Pass
Constant
390 Adams/View
MDI Insight Build
This command enables you to write all the investigation .adm and .acf files out to disk. This can be
helpful if you do not want to run all the simulations in one Adams/View session or if you want to
distribute the jobs to multiple CPUs. This command temporarily sets solver preferences to
write_files_only and creates the simulation and command files. You can subsequently use the primary
driver .acf file (<prefix>_bat.acf) to run all the simulations. When all the jobs have completed
successfully, you use the commands MDI INSIGHT LOAD to load the results back into the
Adams/Insight experiment file with the use of <prefix>_bat.cmd.
If you use the <prefix>_bat.acf file to launch all the simulations, note the following:
Be sure your SENSOR statements do not have the HALT qualifier.
If one job fails, the process will need to be restarted manually.
Instead of the <prefix>_bat.acf you can create a script to run the jobs.
Set nosep.
Once the analysis files have been written, it is important to check a few of the files to verify that the
factors are actually being altered the way you expect them to. Using a text file differencing tool is a
convenient way to accomplish this task.
To run the simulations external to Adams/View, make sure you select the appropriate simulation script
type and that you're saving the appropriate OUTPUT files. It is recommended that you perform a
Perimeter Study exercising each aspect of this process before running the longer set of simulations.
Once the simulations have completed, be sure to review the simulations results by checking .req and .msg
file sizes. Also, perform a grep for ERROR in the .msg files.
After the simulation results have been completed and read back into Adams/Insight, make sure you
review the contents of the response columns in the WorkSpace matrix.
Do the following:
Ain Prefix
Enter the prefix that will be added to the beginning of all the files generated during
the build process, and then subsequently during the simulations.
J - O 391
Macro Editor
Macro Editor
Tools Macro Edit New
Edits Macros that you recorded or that you created by reading in a macro file. You can also use the Macro
Editor to create a macro.
Note:
If you select Modify from this menu, the Database Navigator appears. From the Database
Navigator, select a macro to modify.
Do the following:
Enter the name of the macro.
User-Entered Command Enter the command string that executes the macro. To use the name of the
macro, select Use Macro Name.
Wrap in Undo
Specify if the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command.
Note that a single undo command can consume a great deal of memory for
very large macros, or slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not
actually use the Undo.
Commands
392 Adams/View
Macro Read
Macro Read
Tools Macro Read
Allows you to read in an existing command file containing the commands to be executed as a macro. You
can also assign a help file or text string to the macro that explains the macro's use.
Learn about Automating Your Work Using Macros.
Do the following:
Enter the name of the macro that Adams/View uses to save the macro in the
Modeling database.
File Name
User Entered Command Specify the command string that executes the macro. The command string
defaults to the name of the macro if you do not enter a command sting.
Note:
Wrap in Undo
Specify if the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command.
Note that a single Undo, while convenient, can consume a great deal of
memory for very large macros or slow macro execution noticeably, even if
you do not actually use the Undo.
Create Panel
Select Yes if you want to create a dialog box, or select no if you do not want
to create a dialog box.
J - O 393
Macro Write
Macro Write
Tools Macro Write
Saves the macro to a command file. Saving the macro to a command file lets you give the macro to
another user, and also helps you modify long macros when you do not have the original file.
If you used non-default values for the other macro data, such as the help string, the command file includes
comments with those values.
Note:
Adams/View saves all macros in the current Modeling database when you save the
database.
Do the following:
Macro Name
File Name
Enter the file name in which to save the macro, and then select OK.
394 Adams/View
Main Toolbox
Main Toolbox
Displays commonly used tools for creating, editing, and selecting modeling elements, as well as
simulating the model and undoing operations. The tools are shortcuts to using the menus in the menu bar.
In addition, many of the tools are Tool stacks. Right-click a tool to display its tool stack.
J - O 395
Main Toolbox
Icon
Description
Select Tool
Measure Toolstack
Joint Toolstack
Motion Toolstack
Animation Controls
Move Toolstack
Displays Adams/PostProcessor
See Fitting a Model in a Window
See Defining a Zoom Area
See Setting the Center of a View Window
396 Adams/View
Main Toolbox
Icon
Description
Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack
Entering a value lets you more precisely control the view display changes,
such as zooming and rotations.
View Orientation Tools
Window Layout
Grid
Depth
Render
Icons
J - O 397
Marker Modify
Marker Modify
Right-click a marker Modify
Allows you to precisely control the location and orientation of your marker. The options available depend
on whether or not the marker is attached to a part, ground, or curve or a node on a flexible body. Select
a topic below:
Marker on Part, Ground, or Curve
Marker Attached to Node on Flexible Body or an external system (when an MNF/MD DB is
specified)
Do the following:
Name
Location
Location Relative To
You can:
Enter the marker in which you specify the location coordinates.
Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
Curve
Enter the curve along which the marker will move. The curve (its
direction and curvature) define the position and orientation of the marker.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Enter the marker that defines the location and orientation of the spline.
The marker acts as a reference coordinate system for the coordinate
values used to define the reference curve points.
398 Adams/View
Marker Modify
Do the following:
Define the velocity of the marker origin along the curve. Select either:
Tangent Velocity - Defines the initial velocity of the marker
the maker along the x-, y-, and z-axes of the Curve Reference
Marker coordinate system. Adams/View projects the initial
velocity onto the curve. Therefore, any contribution of the
specified initial velocity vector that is not along the curve is
discarded.
Orientation/
Along Axis Orientation/
In Plane Orientation
Orientation Relative To
You can:
Specify the orientation coordinates.
Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
Solver ID
J - O 399
Marker Modify
the marker so it is offset from the node or you can attach it to several nodes. Learn about Adding Markers
to Flexible Bodies.
Do the following:
Name
Location
Location Relative To
You can:
Enter the marker in which you specify the location coordinates.
Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
Node ID
Snap
Orientation/
Orientation
Along Axis Orientation
In Plane Orientation
Orientation Relative To
You can:
Specify the orientation coordinates.
Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
Solver ID
400 Adams/View
Marker Tool
Marker Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Marker Tool
When you select to create a marker using the Marker tool, you specify the marker's location and
orientation (when you define a marker on a curve, its orientation is prescribed implicitly). You can align
the orientation of the marker with the global coordinate system, the current view coordinate system, or a
coordinate system that you define. When you define a coordinate system, you specify one or two of its
axes and Adams/View calculates the other axes accordingly.
After you create the marker, you can make changes to it, such as attach it to several nodes of a flexible
body and align it so it stays along a specified curve. Learn about modifying marker with Marker Modify
dialog box help.
Note:
You can parameterize the locations and orientations of other objects to that of markers. For
example, you can align the location of a part to be the same as a marker regardless of how
the marker moves. Unlike points, whose parameterization is automatic, you must set up
relationship of markers to other objects. For more information on establishing parameteric
relationships, see, Improving Your Model Designs.
Tip:
To reorient the marker, use the Align & Rotate tool from the Move tool stack, select Align
One Axis, and then follow the prompts:
Select the object to align (the first marker)
Select the axis on object to align (z-axis on first marker)
Select the direction for the axis:
Select the center of the first marker
Select the center of the second marker
J - O 401
Marker Tool
Do the following:
Select either:
Add to Part - Adds the marker to another part in your model.
Add to Ground - Adds the marker to ground.
Add to Curve - Adds the marker to a spline curve.
Tip:
Select an orientation method for how you want the marker oriented. When
you define a marker on a curve, its orientation is prescribed implicitly.
402 Adams/View
Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table)
Displays the Debug table, which contains a running count of the iterations needed to solve the equations
of motion for the current Simulation. You can use the information as a measure of how many
computations Adams/Solver is performing.
Learn more about Debugging Your Model.
The option:
Time
Type
The type of simulation currently being run. It can be one of the following:
DYN for a Dynamic simulation.
KIN for a Kinematic simulation.
STA for a Static equilibrium simulation.
TRA for Transient simulation.
QST for Quasi-static simulation.
ICD for initial conditions displacements.
ICV for initial conditions velocity.
ICA for initial conditions acceleration.
EIG for Eigen solution.
STM for state matrix solution.
Steps
The current Output step number. It is a running count of the number of integration
steps taken, and you can use it as a measure of how hard Adams/Solver is working.
Learn about displaying a strip chart of this information.
Step Size
Iterations
The number of the current iteration. It is one at the beginning of each time step and
increments by one until Adams/Solver converges to a solution or exceeds the
maximum allowable number of iterations.
Order
The order of the predictor. It corresponds to the order of the polynomial Adams/Solver
uses to predict the solution at the end of an integration step.
Rank
The current ranking of the modeling objects in order of their experiencing the most
error or the greatest change, acceleration, or force, depending on the element that you
are currently tracking.
Element
The modeling objects experiencing the most error or the greatest change, acceleration,
or force, depending on the element that you are currently tracking. The number of
objects listed depends on the number you requested in the Show box.
J - O 403
Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table)
The option:
Hits
The number of times the modeling object was placed in the top n of modeling objects
where n is the number of modeling objects that appear in the maximum list. You
specify the number of objects in the maximum list in the Show box.
Percent
The percentage of time the modeling object was placed in the top n of modeling objects
where n is the number of modeling objects that appear in the maximum list. You
specify the number of objects in the maximum list in the Show box.
History Depth Number of iterations for which the listed modeling objects appeared. You can change
this value.
Show
The number of modeling objects that appear in the maximum list. You can change this
value. By default, Adams/View displays three objects in the list at any one time.
404 Adams/View
Measure Attributes
Measure Attributes
Build Object Measure Modify Measure Attributes Tool
When you modify a measure, you can set the attributes for a Strip chart, including creating a legend,
setting axis limits, and setting the color and line type for the curve.
Do the following:
Enter the name of the measure whose attributes you want to set.
General Attributes
Legend
Enter text that describes the data that the curve in the strip chart represents. The
text appears in the title bar of the strip chart. Note that you have to redisplay the
strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend. Learn about redisplaying
strip charts.
Comments
Enter text that describes the measure. The text appears in Adams/PostProcessor
when you transfer the strip chart to it for plotting. See Comments.
Learn how to transfer a strip chart to Adams/PostProcessor.
Axis Attributes
Lower/Lower/Label Currently not available.
Type
default.
logar (Logarithmic) - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is
separated by the same distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100,
1000, and 10,000 are equally spaced.
db (Decibel) - Displays 20 * log 10 (value) for each value.
default - Selecting this means no specific axis type is requested and it
appears in the default axis type, which is usually linear. Learn how to
transfer a strip chart to Adams/PostProcessor.
Axis Attributes
Note that you have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend using the options
below. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.
Line Type
Select a type of line style for the curve. For example, you can select a line that
alternates between dots and dashes.
Symbol
Set the type of symbol displayed at data points along the curve.
J - O 405
Measure Attributes
Do the following:
Color
Thickness
Change the weight of the curve line. Weight values range from 1 to 5 screen
pixels.
406 Adams/View
Measure Distance
Measure Distance
Tools Measure Distance
Calculates the relative distance and orientation between two positions in your model (Markers, Points, or
a marker/point) and ground. Adams/View calculates the following distance information:
Magnitude
x, y, and z component
Angular displacement
You can also select that Adams/View calculate the results relative to a reference marker. You can select
to measure the distance at the model's initial configuration (how you built it) or at a particular simulation
step. You can specify a time, frame number, or a configuration of the model. You can view the results in
an Information window or have Adams/View store the results in a file.
Learn more about Measuring Distance Between Positions.
Do the following:
First Position
Enter the marker from which you want to measure the distance.
Second Position
Ref Position
You can:
Enter a marker or point that defines the coordinate system in
coordinate system.
Write Result to File Name
Enter the name of the file in which you want to save the distance
information. If you want the information written to a directory other
than the one from which you are running Adams/View, include the
path.
Note:
Model Name/
Analysis Name
Choose either:
Model Name - To calculate the distance based on the current
configuration of a model.
Analysis Name - To calculate the distance based on a
configuration or simulation time in a particular Simulation.
J - O 407
Measure Distance
Do the following:
Enter the name of the current model in the text box. If you want to
measure distance in the current model, you do not need to enter a
model name.
Configuration/Time/Frame
Number
408 Adams/View
Measure Toolstack
Measure Toolstack
Main toolbox Measure toolstack
J - O 409
Merge Tool
Merge Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Merge Tool
Merges two non-intersecting rigid body geometries into one without performing any Boolean operations
on the geometry. The geometry can contain any type of geometry: solid, wire, or complex. The geometry
can also belong to the same part. If the geometry belongs to the different parts, The Merge tool merges
the parts into one.
Because Adams/View does not perform any Boolean operations on the merged geometries, overlapping
volumes produce double-density mass in the part and change the results of the mass property
calculations. Therefore, you should use this operation only for non-intersecting rigid bodies that the Unite
Tool cannot combine.
Adams/View merges the second geometry that you select into the first geometry you select.
Learn about Merging Geometry.
410 Adams/View
Merge Two Models
Allows you to merge one Model in your Modeling database into another model. Adams/View maintains
the source model and does not change it after the merge operation.
This is helpful for merging two subsystems stored in the same database into a single model. It allows you
to work on each subsystem individually and merge them together when you are ready to work on them
as a whole.
Learn about the procedure for Merging Models.
Do the following:
Model to be merged
Enter the name of the source model that you want merged into the
destination model.
You can browse for a model by right-clicking the text boxes and selecting
the appropriate commands.
Translate
Rotation
Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source
model.
Optional. Enter a new or existing group into which Adams/View adds all
merged objects. Learn about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
Merge/Rename
Select either:
Merge - Merge parts that have the same name.
Rename - Rename the parts before merging the models.
Note:
This option affects parts only. All other objects in the model to
be merged which share the same name as those in the base
model will automatiocally have an indexing suffix (for
example, _2) added to their names in the merged model.
When Rename parts is selected, this option will merge the ground parts
rather than renaming them.
J - O 411
Message (.msg) Content
Selecting Message (.msg) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set
the contents of the Message file. You only receive a message file when you are using External
Adams/Solver. Learn about setting the type of Adams/Solver.
Do the following:
Topology
Statistics
Prints a block of information for each kinematic, static, or dynamic step. This
information helps you monitor the simulation process and locate the source of the
error if there is a problem. Each step consists of two phases:
A forward step in time (the predictor for dynamics)
The solution of the equations of motion (the corrector for dynamics)
For more information, see the argument EPRINT in the DEBUG command in the
Adams/Solver online help.
Verbose
Prints additional information, such as the name of the subroutine from which
Adams/Solver sends each diagnostic, explanations, and possible remedies (when
available). If you set Verbose to No, Adams/Solver outputs only basic error
messages.
412 Adams/View
Message Settings
Message Settings
View Message Window Settings
Allows you to set the messages displayed in the Message Window and clear the messages from the
window. By default, the message window only displays error and fatal messages and messages from
commands that you execute from the user interface (for example, menus and dialog boxes). You can also
display messages that you execute from the Command window, Command Navigator, and command files.
In addition, you can set the severity level of the messages displayed, from informational to fatal
messages. Learn about Managing Messages in Adams/View.
Do the following:
Select if you want to display messages that you execute from the user
interface, command window, Command Navigator, and command
files.
Information
Warning
Error
Fault
Clear
J - O 413
Message Window
Message Window
View Message Window
Provides you with messages on the status of Adams/View and displays helpful information while you are
using Adams.
Adams/View displays messages about the execution of a command in the message window. By default,
the message window only displays messages about commands you execute from the user interface. You
can also set it to display messages about commands that you execute from the Command window,
Command Navigator, and command files.
Learn about Managing Messages in Adams/View.
414 Adams/View
MNF and MD DB Transformation
It performs transformation on an already existing flexible body or Modal Neutral File (MNF) or MD DB
File (.master). The types of transformation operations that can be performed are:
Translation - Translate along a vector, by specified distance.
Rotation - Rotate about an axis, by specified angle.
Mirroring - Mirror about a plane.
Do the following:
Select either:
Flexible Body Name, and then select a flexible body that already
exists.
MNF File, and then select the name of the MNF to import.
MD DB, and then select the name of the MD DB to import.
The parameter applies only, when you select MD DB file. The parameter
specifies the index of the flexible body in the specified MD DB. The parameter
is optional. Default value is 1.
Note:
You can view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB, using the
button provided beside the Index. The desired flexible body can be
selected by double-clicking on the displayed list.
MNF/MD DB
Select the appropriate option for Output File and enter the name of the MNF
or the MD DB file.
Create Flexible
Body...
Select to open Create a Flexible Body dialog box after the intended
transformation is carried out, so that you can create the flexible body and see
the transformation.
Mirror
Translate
Rotate
Select to perform rotation operation. You need to specify the axis about which
rotation can be done and an angle for rotation.
J - O 415
MNF and MD DB Transformation
Do the following:
Specify either of these three methods to specify the mirroring plane:
Plane Normal to Vector - This option allows you to specify a vector
which is normal to the plane about which you want to mirror the
flexible body.
Plane From 3 Points - This option allows you to specify three points
which define a vector normal to the plane about which you want to
mirror the flexible body.
If Plane Normal to Vector is selected, following options are available.
Direction
global X axis.
Global Y - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global Y axis.
Global Z - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global Z axis.
X axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is
Direction Vector
Location
Specify the coordinates of three points that define the mirroring plane.
416 Adams/View
MNF and MD DB Transformation
Do the following:
Enter the coordinates of two end points of a vector that is normal to the
mirroring plane.
plane.
Direction From 2 Points - direction is specified by two end points of
a vector.
If Direction From Vector option is selected, the following options will be available.
Direction
global X axis.
Global Y - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of
global Y axis.
Global Z - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of
global Z axis.
X axis of Marker - This option translates the flexible body in the
direction.
Marker
Direction Vector
If Direction Normal to 3 Points option is selected, the following options will be available.
Point 1, Point 2,
Point3
Specify the coordinates of three points that define a plane. Translation will be
performed in the direction which is normal to the plane.
If Direction From 2 Points option is selected, the following options will be available.
From Location, To
Location
Enter the coordinates of two end points; translation will be done in the
direction of the two end points.
J - O 417
MNF and MD DB Transformation
Do the following:
Enter the distance for translation of the flexible body. Except for the Direction
From 2 Points option you are required to specify a value for Distance. For
Direction From 2 Points option, if Distance is not specified it is calculated to
be the distance between the two points.
normal.
Direction From 2 Points - rotation axis is defined by two end points.
If Direction From Vector option is selected, the following options are available.
Direction
Marker's X axis.
Y axis of Marker - The rotation axis is parallel to the specified
Marker's Y axis.
Z axis of Marker - The rotation axis is parallel to the specified
Marker's Z axis.
User Defined - The rotation axis is parallel to the user specified
vector..
Marker
Direction Vector
Center of rotation
If Direction Normal to 3 Points option is selected, the following options are available.
Point 1 (center of
rotation), Point 2,
Point3
Enter the coordinates of the three points that define a plane; rotation will be
done about the axis which is normal to the plane, using Point 1 as the center of
rotation.
If Direction From 2 Points option is selected, the following options are available.
From Location, To
Location
Enter the coordinates of end points; the end points define the axis for rotation.
418 Adams/View
MNF and MD DB Transformation
Do the following:
Angle
This option allows you to offset all the node IDs or to specify new interface IDs
of the flexible body. This option is common for all the transformation options
(that is, Mirroring, Translation and Rotation).
Node Offset - Enter a value to offset all the node IDs.
New Interface IDs - Enter new interface IDs for the current interface
node IDs. Here the number of interface node ids entered have to be
less than or equal to current interface node IDs of the flexible body.
If you check the More option following parameter will appear.
MNF Write Options
J - O 419
Model Verify Tool
Checks for error conditions in your model, such as misaligned joints, unconstrained parts, or massless
parts in dynamic models, and alerts you to other possible problems. It is a good tool to use periodically
as you add detail to or refine your model.
The Model Verify tool calculates the number of Degrees of freedom (DOF) in your model. It gives you
two separate calculations:
The Gruebler count, which is a rough estimate of the number of DOF in your model using the
Gruebler equation to add up the number of DOF introduced by parts and to subtract the number
of DOF removed by constraints.
The actual number and type of movable parts and constraints in the model that Adams/Solver
420 Adams/View
Modify Body
Modify Body
Right-click part Part name Modify
J - O 421
Modify Body - Ground Part
ground part may not be what you want so you will need to define another part as the ground part.
You build a model that represents a small subset of your actual system, and then want to expand
the model and need to redefine what is ground. For example, if you were modeling a door handle
on a car door, you might just have a simple model where the door is ground. Later, you may want
to expand the model so that the door swings on the car frame. In that case, you would want to
define a new part representing the car body as ground and attach the old ground to the car body
with a revolute joint.
For the option:
New Ground
Do the following:
Enter a new or existing part to be used as the ground part. Tips on Entering
Object Names in Text Boxes.
Add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it.
Learn about Comments.
422 Adams/View
Modify Body - Mass Properties
Do the following:
Set to:
Material Type
Geometry and Density
User Input
Enter the type of material for the rigid body. Adams/View displays the
materials composition below the text box. Adams/View uses the density
associated with the material type and volume of the geometry of the part to
calculate the parts mass and inertia. Learn about Standard Material
Properties. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Enter the density of the part. Adams/View uses the parts density and the
volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.
Enter the marker that is to be used to define the center-of-mass (CM) for
the part.
J - O 423
Modify Body - Mass Properties
Do the following:
Select to enter the cross-products of inertia (Ixy, Ixz, and Iyz). Clear to enter
just the principal mass moments of inertia (Ixx, Iyy, Izz).
Inertia Reference Marker Specify the marker that defines the axes for the inertia properties. If you do
not enter an inertia marker, Adams/View uses the part CM marker for
inertia properties.
Add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it.
You can enter any alphanumeric characters. The comments appear in the
Information window when you select to display information about the
request, in the Adams/View Log file, and in a command or dataset file when
you export your model to these types of files.
424 Adams/View
Modify Body - Name and Position
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the rigid body.
Solver ID
Location
Enter the coordinates to which you want to move an object. If you enter a location
in the Relative To text box, Adams/View applies the coordinates relative to that
coordinate system.
Orientation/
Along Axis/
In Plane
Relative To
Enter a reference frame relative to which the location and orientation are defined.
Planar
Specify the characteristic length of the flexible body for linear limit check. This
should be in the model length unit.
Dynamic Limit
Stability Factor
J - O 425
Modify Body - Position Initial Conditions
location.
Orientation fixes any of the current body-fixed 313 rotational coordinates (psi, theta, or phi
angles) as the initial orientation. These rotation angles are those associated with a body-fixed
313 rotation sequence regardless of which sequence you set as the default for the modeling
database. (Learn about Rotation Sequences.)
If Adams/Solver has to alter part positions to obtain consistent initial conditions during an initial
conditions simulation, it does not vary the coordinates you specify, unless it must vary them to satisfy the
initial conditions you specify for a joint or a motion.
If you fix the initial positions of too many parts, the initial conditions simulation can fail. Use initial
positions sparingly.
Do the following:
Select the coordinates that you want fixed during initial conditions
simulation.
Select the angles that you want fixed during initial conditions simulation.
Add any comments about the part to help you manage and identify it. Learn
about Comments.
426 Adams/View
Modify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions
ground or another marker in your model. You can specify translational velocity for each vector
component of the marker.
Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a parts rotational position with respect to the
CM marker of the part or another marker in your model. You can specify angular velocity for
each vector component of the marker.
If you specify initial velocities, Adams/View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during assemble
model operations, regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave some or all of the
velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part during an
assemble operation depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. Note that it is not
the same as setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an initial velocity to zero means that the part will
not be moving in the specified direction when the simulation starts, regardless of any forces and
constraints acting upon it.
Do the following:
Marker
Select and enter a marker along whose axes the translational velocity vector
components will be specified.
Select the axes in which you want to define velocity and enter the velocity
in the text box that appears next to the axes check boxes. Remember,
leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part
during an initial conditions simulation, depending on the other forces and
constraints acting on the part. It is not the same as setting the initial velocity
to zero.
Marker
Select and enter a marker about whose axes the translational or angular
velocity vector components will be specified.
J - O 427
Modify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions
Do the following:
Select the axes in which you want to define velocity and enter the velocity
in the text box that appears next to the axes check boxes. Remember,
leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part
during an initial conditions simulation, depending on the other forces and
constraints acting on the part. It is not the same as setting the initial velocity
to zero.
Add any comments about the body to help you manage and identify it.
Learn about Comments.
428 Adams/View
Modify Bushing
Modify Bushing
Right-click bushing Modify
Do the following:
Action Body
Reaction Body
Translational Properties:
Stiffness
Damping
Preload
Enter three constant force (preload) values. Constant values indicate the
magnitude of the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axeis of the
coordinate system marker of the reaction body (J marker) when both the
relative translational displacement and velocity of the markers on the
action and reaction bodies are zero.
Damping
Preload
Enter three constant torque (preload) values. Constant values indicate the
magnitude of the torque components about the x-, y-, and z-axes of the
coordinate system marker on the reaction body (J marker) when both the
relative rotational displacement and velocity of the markers on the action
and reaction bodies are zero.
Force Display
Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts,
both, or none.
J - O 429
Modify Bushing
Do the following:
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Select to change the position of the force using the Precision Move dialog
box.
Select to create a force measure. Learn about creating Object Measures
430 Adams/View
Modify Comment
Modify Comment
Modify/Create Dialog Box
Adds notes about the objects in your Model, and for Template-Based products, about entities in your
subsystem, to help you manage and identify them. The types of objects about which you can add
comments in Adams/View are listed below. For parts, constraints, and forces, you add comments when
you modify the object. For models, you can add the comments as you create the model, and you can also
modify the comments.
Models
Parts
Constraint
Forces
Materials
Do the following:
Object
Type
Enter the type of object for which you are creating comments.
Comment Text
Date
Select to add the date when you created the comments. In template-based products,
it adds both date and time.
Time
Clear
Reset
J - O 431
Modify Coupler
Modify Coupler
Right-click coupler Modify
Modifies a coupler allowing you to specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or
to create a three-joint coupler.
Learn about:
Modifying Couplers
Creating Couplers
Do the following:
Name
By Scales/By
Displacement/User Defined
Change the joints to be coupled, and then set Freedom Type to their
type. If you have any cylindrical joints, you can specify either
translational or rotational displacement. Translational joints always
have translational displacements. Revolute joints always have
rotational displacements.
Scale
If the coupler is linear, enter a scale for the second and third coupled
joints. The scales are r2 and r3 in the following equation:
delta1 + r2 * delta2 + r3 * delta3 =0
Routine
432 Adams/View
Modify Extrusion
Modify Extrusion
Right-click an extrusion Modify
Allows you to control the location and orientation of an Extrusion and allows you to rename the extrusion.
Learn about Extrusion tool.
Do the following:
Extrusion Name
New Name
Reference Marker Specify the marker used to locate and orient the extrusion.
Relative To
Specify the coordinate system in which the location and orientation coordinates
are specified. If you do not specify this parameter, Adams/View uses the reference
marker.
Profile Points/
Profile Curve
Select either:
Profile Points - Enter the locations of the points that define the profile. The
to display the
Location table.
Profile Curve - Enter the object used to define the profile of the extrusion.
You can specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline as the
profile curve. The object should be in the xy plane of the reference marker.
Path Points/
Path Curve/
Length along Z
Select either:
Path Points - Enter points used to define the path of the extrusion. The points
are relative to the reference marker. The points define the path along which the
profile curve will be extended.
To edit the locations of the points, select the More button
Location Table.
to display the
Path Curve - Enter the object used to define the path of the extrusion. You can
specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline. The object
defines the path along which the profile curve is extended.
Length along Z - Z-axis of the reference marker defining the straight line
along which the profile curve will be extruded. Enter a positive length to
extrude along the +z-axis.
J - O 433
Modify Extrusion
Do the following:
Select to add any comments about the extrusion that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it.
Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.
434 Adams/View
Modify FEMDATA
Modify FEMDATA
Build Data Elements FEMDATA Modify
Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite
element or fatigue life analysis. You use the Solver Settings Output More Durability Files
to specify the type of file to produce (for more information, see Solver Settings - Output dialog box help
and Adams/Durability online help). Adams/View will not output to any files unless you specify the format.
For the
option:
Do the following:
Type
and applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and inertial
forces of the specified body (angular velocities and accelerations including
effects of gravity) as a function of time. Load data will be output in the
simulation set of units.
Modal Deformation - Outputs modal deformations as a function of time of
the specified flexible body. Adams/View will only export coordinates of the
active modes in the simulation.
Nodal Deformation - Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time of
neutral file (MNF) of the specified flexible body. Adams/View outputs all
six components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shearYZ, shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of the
flexible body.
Stress - Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the
Modal Neutral File (MNF) of the flexible body. Adams/View outputs all six
Enter the rigid body marker to be the reference coordinate system to output loads.
Because Adams/Solver resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the coordinate
system of the specified marker, the marker should represent the FEA basic
coordinate system of the part's finite element model (FEM).
J - O 435
Modify FEMDATA
For the
option:
Peak Slice
Do the following:
Select that FEM load data are to be output only at those time steps where the
specified peak load occurred in the simulation. With the START and END,
Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load.
You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, and GMAG.
Enter the name of the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Peak Slice
Select that FEM load data are to be output only at those time steps where the
specified peak load occurred in the simulation. With the START and END,
Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load.
You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG.
Specifies the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Enter the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Nodes
Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not
specify a node list, FEMDATA exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that does not
belong to the flexible body.
Datum
Enter a node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of the nodal displacements.
Adams/Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to this node ID. If you do
not specify a datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of nodal
displacements. It displays a warning message if the specified node does not belong
to the flexible body.
Specifies the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Nodes
Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not
specify a node list, FEMDATA exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that does not
belong to the flexible body.
436 Adams/View
Modify FEMDATA
For the
option:
Do the following:
File
Enter the output file name for the FEM data. You can specify an existing directory,
root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be composed of the
Adams run and body IDs according to the type of data and file format that you
specified in the Solver Settings Output More Durability Files (for more
information, see Adams/Durability online help).
Time
Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:
From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the
J - O 437
Modify Force
Modify Force
Right-click single-component force Modify
also change the reaction body. You cannot change a force created on one part and ground to a
force created between two parts because the direction methods are not compatible. Youll have to
delete the force and create it again.
Force magnitude.
Force graphics
The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.
Learn more about:
How To create a single-component force:
Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces
Modifying Single-Component Forces
Do the following:
Name
Direction
Set the number of parts affected and the direction of the force:
On One Body, Fixed in Space - Sets the force direction so it is applied to
to a part. A second part (the direction part) defines the direction of the
force.
Between Two Bodies - Creates a force between two parts. One of the
parts can be ground. You cannot change a force on one part to a force
defined between two parts or the reverse. You can, however, change a
torque on one part to a torque on two parts or the reverse.
The following text boxes are available depending on how you defined the direction of the force.
Body
Action Body
For a force defined between two parts, change the action body to which the force
is applied.
Reaction Body
438 Adams/View
Modify Force
Do the following:
Direction Body
Change the body that defines the direction of the force if you selected the direction
option, On One Body, Moving with Other Body.
Define Using
Function
If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following in the Function
(time) text box that appears:
Constant force value
Function expression
Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed
to a user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is optional.
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine SFOSUB. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Force Display
Set whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none.
By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body for singlecomponent forces.
J - O 439
Modify General Force
Do the following:
Force Name
Action Part/
Action Marker
Reaction Part/
Change the reaction body or marker that receives the reaction forces.
Reaction Marker
Reference Marker
Change the reference marker that indicates the direction of the force.
Define Using
X Force/
If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following for each
component of the force:
Y Force/
Constant force value
Z Force/
AX Torque/
Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select
the More button
AY Torque/
AZ Torque
Parameters and ID
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine GFOSUB.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
440 Adams/View
Modify General Force
Do the following:
Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both,
or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action
body.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Select to create a force measure. Learn about creating Object Measures
J - O 441
Modify Geometric Spline
Do the following:
Name
Closed
Select Yes if you want the spline to be closed or select no if you want the spline to
be open.
Segment Count
Values
Enter values for the locations of the points that define the spline. The points are
relative to the reference marker.
You can edit the locations of the points by selecting the More button
to
display the Location table. The values cannot be modified if a reference_profile is
specified.
Reference Marker Enter the marker that defines the location and orientation of the spline. The marker
acts as a reference coordinate system for the coordinate values used to define the
reference curve points.
Reference Curve
Displays the existing data element curve that is used to mathematically define the
spline. When you define the points that make up the spline, Adams/View creates
a curve fit through the points. Learn about Data Element Modify Curve dialog box.
Reference Profile
Enter an existing Wire Geometry from which the bspline is to be created. Note that
the ref curve and matrix will be automatically generated and hence the
corresponding fields are disabled if a profile is specified.
442 Adams/View
Modify Geometric Spline
Do the following:
Reference Matrix
Displays a data element matrix that contains all the spline point coordinates. Learn
about Create/Modify Matrix dialog box.
Spread Points
Specify the value to yes or no (applicable only when a ref profile is specified).
If specified to yes, then the generated bspline will have its points equally spaced.
Specify the number of points on the bspline. This parameter is usable only if
spread points is specified to yes.
Select to enter any comments about the geometry that you want to enter to help
you manage and identify it. See Comments.
Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.
J - O 443
Modify Joint
Modify Joint
Right-click idealized or primitive joint Modify
444 Adams/View
Modify Joint
Do the following:
Enter the name of the joint to modify.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Type
Select the type of joint to which you want to change the current joint.
The following are exceptions to changing a joints type:
You can only change a simple idealized joint to another type of simple
addition, if a joint has friction and you change the joint type, Adams/View
returns an error.
First Body
Second Body
Change the part that the first body moves relative to.
Force Graphics
Pitch Value
For a screw joint, enter its pitch value (translational displacement for every full
rotational cycle).
Impose Motion
Select to impose motion on the joint. After selecting, set the translational or
rotational displacement or velocity, and then select OK.
Note:
Initial Conditions Select to set initial conditions for a revolute, translational, or cylindrical joint using
the Joint Initial Conditions dialog box. Learn About Initial Conditions for Joints.
Add any comments about the joint that you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Select to change the position of the joint using the Precision Move dialog box.
Select to apply friction to the joint. See Create/Modify Friction dialog box help.
J - O 445
Modify Modal ICs
Displays all the modes in the flexible body and lets you enable and disable them, and set their initial
conditions. An asterisk (*) appears next to all modes that are enabled.
To enable or disable modes:
Highlight the modes that you want to enable or disable.
Select Disable Highlighted Modes or Enable Highlighted Modes.
Do the following:
Set Exact
Clear Exact
In the text box, enter the initial condition for modal displacement, and
then select Apply Displacement IC to set the initial condition for the
highlighted mode.
In the text box, enter the initial condition for modal velocity, and then
select Apply Velocity IC to set the initial condition for the highlighted
mode.
446 Adams/View
Modify Run-Time Clearance
Run-Time Clearances can be used to monitor the clearance distance between two selected
geometries/flexible bodies. This clearance distance is based upon tesselation of geometry or analytical
representation of known geometry. For flexible parts, clearance is based upon the external face geometry
in the MNF.
The clearance tool only considers distance between polygons (whether from a mesh for flexible parts or
from tesselation of geometry) so additional single point nodes are left out of the clearance analysis.
After a simulation is complete, the minimum clearance location between the two geometries/flexible
bodies may be animated. This is represented as a line between the objects involved. You can also plot the
clearance result sets and export the clearance data in the results file.
Multiple clearance analyses may be conducted between the same two bodies by selecting different
regions of a flexible part for each analysis.
Do the following:
Clearance Name
Clearance Type
Threshold
Optional field to allow the user to specify a maximum distance for which
the clearance calculations will not be computed. Set to 0.0 by default.
If you selected Geometry to Geometry, Adams/View displays the following two options:
I Geometry
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same
part.
J Geometry
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same
part.
If you selected Geometry to Flexible Body, Adams/View displays the following four options:
I Geometry
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same
part.
J Flexible Body
J - O 447
Modify Run-Time Clearance
Do the following:
J Region
This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of
specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered,
then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. J
Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by rightclicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node"
option.Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the
nodes with the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse
button to finish.
Exclude J Regions
Toggle Box that either excludes or includes all the nodes in the J Region
selected in the clearance Computation. If this field is not entered, all the J
Region nodes selected will be included in the Clearance computation.
If you selected Flexible Body to Geometry Adams/View displays the following four options:
I Flex Body
I Region
This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of
specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered,
then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. I
Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by rightclicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node" option.
Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the nodes with
the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse button to finish.
J Geometry
Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same
part.
Exclude I Regions
Toggle Box that either excludes or includes all the nodes in the I Region
selected in the clearance Computation. If this field is not entered, all the I
Region nodes selected will be included in the Clearance computation.
If you selected Flexible Body to Geometry Adams/View displays the following five options:
I Flex Body
I Region
This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of
specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered,
then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. I
Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by rightclicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node" option.
Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the nodes with
the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse button to finish.
Note:
448 Adams/View
Modify Run-Time Clearance
Do the following:
J Flex Body
J Region
This Field that appears only for Flexible bodies and allows selection of
specific nodes in the MNF for clearance analysis. If this field is not entered,
then all the nodes in the MNF are considered for the clearance analysis. J
Region Nodes can be entered either by typing the node numbers or by rightclicking on the field and selecting the "Pick FlexBody Node"
option.Multiple flexible body nodes can be selected by clicking on the
nodes with the left mouse button and then clicking on the right mouse
button to finish.
Note:
Exclude I Regions
Toggle Box that either excludes or includes all the nodes in the I Region
selected in the clearance Computation. If this field is not entered, all the I
Region nodes selected will be included in the Clearance computation.
Exclude J Regions
Toggle Box that either excludes or includes all the nodes in the J Region
selected in the clearance Computation. If this field is not entered, all the J
Region nodes selected will be included in the Clearance computation.
J - O 449
Modify Surface of Revolution
Allows you to control the location and orientation of a revolution. Learn about the Revolution Tool.
Do the following:
Revolution Name
New Name
Reference Marker
Relative To
Angle Extent
Number of Sides
Profile Points/Profile
Curve
Select either:
Profile Points - Enter points used to define the profile of the
to
450 Adams/View
Modify Torque
Modify Torque
Right-click single-component torque Modify
The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.
Learn about:
Single-Component Torque tool
Modifying Single-Component Forces
Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces
Do the following:
Name
Direction
Set the number of parts affected and the direction of the torque:
On One Body, Fixed in Space - Sets the force direction so it is applied
applied to a part. A second part (the direction part) defines the direction
of the force.
Between Two Bodies - Creates a force between two parts. One of the
parts can be ground. You cannot change a force on one part to a force
defined between two parts or the reverse. You can, however, change a
torque on one part to a torque on two parts or the reverse.
Note:
You cannot change a force created on one part and ground to a force
created between two parts because the direction methods are not
compatible. Youll have to delete the force and create it again.
The following text boxes are available depending on how you defined the direction of the force:
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Body
Action Body
For a force defined between two parts, change the action body to which the
force is applied.
J - O 451
Modify Torque
Do the following:
Reaction Body
Direction Body
Change the body that defines the direction of the force if you selected the
direction option, On One Body, Moving with Other Body.
Define Using
Function
If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following in the Function
(time) text box that appears:
Constant force value
Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function text box, select the More
button
to display the Function Builder.
Parameters and ID
If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed
to a user-written subroutine and its ID.
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Torque Display
Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or
none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body for
single-component torques.
452 Adams/View
Modify Torque Vector
Do the following:
Force Name
Action Part/Action
Marker
Reaction
Part/Reaction Marker
Change the reaction body or marker that receives the reaction forces.
Reference Marker
Change the reference marker that indicates the direction of the force.
Define Using
AX Torque/
If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following for each
component of the force:
AY Torque/
Constant force value
AZ Torque
Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the
More button
to display the Function Builder.
Parameters and ID
If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed
to a user-written subroutine and the ID of the torque being modified.
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the standard user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Force Display
Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or
none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body.
J - O 453
Modify Torque Vector/Modify General Force
Modifies either a Three-component torque or a Six-component general force. Its title and options change
depending on the type of force. Select a title below for more information on the options available:
Modify Torque Vector (three-component torque)
Modify General Force
454 Adams/View
Modify a Request
Modify a Request
Build Measure REQUEST Modify
Modifies a request.
Learn about Creating Requests.
Do the following:
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the request to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Set to:
Define Using Type & Markers
Define Using Function Expressions
Define Using Subroutines
If you selected Define Using Type & Markers, the following options appear:
Output Type
Routine
Title
J - O 455
Modify a Request
Do the following:
If you selected Define Using Function Expressions, the following options appear:
f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8
Title
Enter a title for the top of each set of information output. The entire
comment must be on one line. The title can be only eighty characters
long. You can use blank spaces and all alphanumeric characters.
However, you cannot use the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the
ampersand (&), and the exclamation point (!).
456 Adams/View
Modify a Spring-Damper Force
Learn about:
Translational Spring Damper Tool
Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers
Do the following:
Action Body
Reaction Body
damper.
Spline: F=f(defo)
No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damper.
Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to deformation.
Damping Coefficient/
No Damping/
spring damper.
Spline: F=f(velo)
No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring.
Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to velocity.
Enter the preload force for the spring damper. Preload force is the force of
the spring damper in its reference position.
J - O 457
Modify a Spring-Damper Force
Do the following:
Select either:
Default Length to automatically use the length of the spring damper
preload position.
Tip:
Spring Graphic
Specify whether coil spring graphics are always on, always off, or on
whenever you have defined a spring coefficient.
Force Display
Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both,
or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action
body.
Damper Graphic
Specify whether cylinder damper graphics are always on, always off, or on
whenever you have defined a damping coefficient.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Select to change the position of the spring damper using the Precision Move
dialog box.
Select to create a force measure.
Learn about creating Object Measures.
458 Adams/View
Modify a Torsion Spring
Do the following:
Name
Action Body
Reaction Body
No Stiffness/
Spline: F=f(defo)
No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damping force.
Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
stiffness to rotational deformation (radians). Learn about defining Splines.
torsion spring.
Spline: F=f(velo)
No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring force.
Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force to
Enter the preload force for the torsion spring. Preload force is the force of the
torsion spring in its preload position.
Default Angle/
Angle at Preload
Default Angle to set the rotation angle of the spring when you created it at
Torque Display
Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both,
or none.
J - O 459
Motions
Motions
Displays tools for creating motions.
Icon
Link
Joint Motions
Construction
or Settings
Container
Icon
Link
General Motions
Translational Motion Tool
Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending
on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link,
Adams/View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it.
Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move
the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
460 Adams/View
New Color
New Color
Postprocessing Edit Preferences Colors Tab New Color button
Defines a new color name in the Modeling database. After creating the new color, return to the Colors
tab in the PPT Preferences dialog box to define its color values. See PPT Preferences - Colors.
Do the following:
Enter a name for the new color.
J - O 461
New Dialog Box
Do the following:
Library
Enter the library in which to store the dialog box. By default, the library is .gui.
Name
Create Buttons
462 Adams/View
No Help Available
No Help Available
There is currently no help available for this dialog box.
J - O 463
Node Finder Dialog Box
Searches for nodes on the replacement flexible body that are within a specified radius or closest to a given
marker. It displays the nodes that it found in the lower portion of the dialog box. This is helpful if you are
not sure to which node to transfer a marker.
Learn about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.
Do the following:
Select how you want to find nodes:
Closest to Marker - Find those nodes closest to the marker specified.
By Radius Around Marker - Find those nodes within a specified radius of
the marker.
Marker Name
Enter the name of the marker that you want to search for nodes closest to.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Number of Nodes
Radius
Node listing
Lists the nodes found. You can copy one of the nodes to the Swap a rigid body
for another flexible body or Swap a flexible body for another flexible body dialog
box:
1. Right-click a node, and then select Copy.
2. In the swap a rigid body/flexible body dialog box, right-click the Node
ID text box, and then select Paste.
464 Adams/View
Object Color Tool Stack
J - O 465
Object Measure
Object Measure
Select object Build Measure Object Create/Modify
Creates a measure on an object in your model, including Point Measures. Its title changes depending on
the type of object. For example, its title is Joint Measure if you are creating a measure on a joint.
In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you
can capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a parts center-of-mass
velocity along the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default
coordinate system is the ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.
Note:
You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, rightclick in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear
the select list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Do the following:
Measure Name
Characteristic
Component
Orientation
Select to help you keep track of the orientations of your local part
coordinate systems as you define them. See Orientation Measure
dialog box help.
Represent coordinates in
466 Adams/View
Object Measure
Do the following:
Select to display a Strip chart of the measure.
Select to set the attributes of the measure. Only available when you
are modifying a measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help.
J - O 467
Object Position Handle
Allows you to create a global position handle with respect to the which you can translate and rotate
selected objects. When you create a global position handle, Adams/View turns off the object position
handle for individual objects.
Learn more about Using Object Position Handle.
Do the following:
Set Handle Location Select and click on the screen to indicate the location of the handle.
Orientation Via
First, in the pull-down menu, select how you want to orient the handle. You can
orient the axes of the handle. By default, the orientation of the position handle
is set to that of the current working grid axes.
Next, select Orientation Via to set.
Reset
Select if you want to reset the location of the global position handle to the
location of the selected object's position handle.
468 Adams/View
Optimize Constraint Evaluate
Lets you interactively apply the design constraint to an analysis and print the resulting value. This helps
you develop and debug constraints. It is a good idea to test your constraint on an existing analysis before
using it in an optimization.
Adams/View prints the constraint value in the Information window.
Learn more About Optimization.
Do the following:
Analysis Name
J - O 469
Optimize Objective Evaluate
Lets you interactively apply the design objective to an analysis and print the resulting value. This helps
you develop and debug objectives. It is a good idea to test your objective on an existing analysis before
using it in an optimization.
Adams/View prints the objective value in the Information window.
Learn more About Optimization.
Do the following:
Analysis Name
470 Adams/View
Orientation Joint Tool
Constrains the marker of one part so that it cannot rotate with respect to a second part as shown below.
In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates
the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part. The axes
of the coordinate systems must maintain the same orientation.
The location of the origins of the coordinate systems does not matter.
Learn:
About Joint Primitives
J - O 471
Orientation Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint and
2 Bodies - 1
Location/
2 Bodies - 2
Locations
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains fixed on
the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should
use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded
view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints to
Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Geometry
Feature
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if it
472 Adams/View
Orientation Measure
Orientation Measure
Build Measure Orientation New/Modify
Note:
When creating an object or point measure, select the Orientation button from the Object
Measure Dialog Box.
Learn more :
About Measuring Orientation Characteristics
About Simulation Output
Do the following:
Measure Name
Characteristic
Component
To Marker
From Marker
Enter the marker representing the coordinate system from which to measure.
J - O 473
Output (Out) Content
Selecting Output (Out) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set
the format of the tabular output file. You only receive a tabular output file when you are using External
Adams/Solver. Learn about setting type of Adams/Solver.
Do the following:
Jacobian Matrix
Prints the Jacobian matrix at each iteration. Learn about setting Jacobian matrix.
Request Data
Prints the YY array (state vector), RHS array (error terms), and DELTA array
(increment to state vector) at each iteration.
Degrees of Freedom Prints a degree-of-freedom table in the tabular output file. The table indicates
whether or not each of the six components of motion (that is, translation along
the x- , y- , and z-axis and rotation about the x- , y- , and z-axis) is constrained
for each part center of mass relative to the origin of the ground reference frame.
These are the degrees of freedom as input.
To determine the degrees of freedom for the degree-of-freedom table,
Adams/Solver factorizes the constraint matrix. Adams/Solver then checks for
columns that are linear combinations of the other columns of the matrix. The
components of motion corresponding to these columns are not constrained. After
the matrix has been factored, Adams/Solver selects the components
corresponding to the zero pivot elements as the degrees of freedom.
Adams/Solver reports these as the independent coordinates in the degree-offreedom table.
Equation Map
Writes the internal representation of a model in the tabular output file after
Adams/Solver reads and checks the input. It maps the equations and variables in
the system and provides their numeric codes.
474 Adams/View
Output (Out) Content
P-Z
P - Z 475
PPT Preferences
PPT Preferences
Edit Preferences
Changes the ways in which Adams/PostProcessor works. In addition, you can specify the directory to
which Adams/PostProcessor saves files.
Tab
Link
Animation
Colors
Curves
Files
Fonts
Geometry
Plot
Units
Stereo
476 Adams/View
PPT Preferences
Tab
Link
Restore
Save
Save
P - Z 477
Page Layouts
Page Layouts
View Page Page Layouts
Allows you to select different page layouts so you can see more than one viewport. Page layout is also
referred to as the viewport layout.
Note:
A page that contains a Fast fourier transform (FFT) or Bode plot has two viewports. For an
FFT plot, the top viewport contains the plot with the input data and the bottom viewport
contains the plot with the output from the FFT. For a Bode plot, the top viewport contains
the gain plot and the bottom viewport contains the phase plot.
Selecting a Layout
You can access the page layout palette in two ways. Both methods contain the same set of viewport
options.
To select a layout:
1. Do either of the following:
On the View menu, point to Page, and then select Page Layouts. The palette appears.
. A selection of layouts
appears.
2. Select a layout.
3. If you used the palette, select Close to close the palette. You can leave the palette open and
continue working so you can quickly change the window.
478 Adams/View
Parallel Axes Joint Tool
Constrains the z-axis of the marker of one part so that it remains parallel to the z-axis of the marker of a
second part, as shown below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects
and the hollow circle indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative
to the second part.
The marker of the first part can only rotate about one axis with respect to the coordinate system of the
second part.
Learn:
About Joint Primitives
P - Z 479
Parallel Axes Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be connected.
Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If there is only
one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to that part and
ground.
2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints to
Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Geometry Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid,
if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
480 Adams/View
Part Create Equation Linear State Equation
Do the following:
Enter the name that you want assigned to the linear state equation.
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the equation to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Enter the array element that defines the state array for the linear system.
The array must be a states (X) array. It cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
Enter the array element that defines the input (or control) array for the
linear system. Entering an inputs (U) array is optional. The array must
be an inputs (U) array. If you enter an inputs (U) array, you must also
specify either a B input matrix, a Dnbsp;feedforward matrix, or both.
The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there
are elements in the inputs (U) array.
Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output
variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is
optional. If you enter an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C
output matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix
elements must have the same number of rows as there are elements in
the outputs (Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot
be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or
transfer function.
IC Array Name
Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial
conditions for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The
IC array must have the same number of elements as the states (X) array
(equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not
specify an IC array, Adams/Solver initializes all states to zero.
P - Z 481
Part Create Equation Linear State Equation
Do the following:
Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix for
the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of
rows and columns), and it must have the same number of columns as
the number of rows in the states (X) array.
Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the
linear system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows
as the A state matrix and the same number of columns as the number of
elements in the inputs (U) array.
Entering a B input matrix is optional. If you enter a B input matrix, you
must also include an inputs (U) array.
Enter the matrix data element that defines the output matrix for the
linear system. The C output matrix must have the same number of
columns as the A state matrix and the same number of rows as the
number of elements in the outputs (Y) array. Entering a C output matrix
is optional. If you enter a C output matrix, you must also include an
outputs (Y) array name.
D Feedforward Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the feedforward matrix for
the linear system. The D feedforward matrix must have the same
number of rows as the number of elements in the Y output array and the
same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U)
array.
When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a
Y output matrix and an inputs (U) array.
Static Hold
Select yes to hold states at the constant value determined during static
and quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change. Learn about
Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
482 Adams/View
Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation
Do the following:
Change the name that you want assigned to the linear state equation.
Adams Id
Comments
Add any comments about the equation to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Enter the array element that defines the state array for the linear system.
The array must be a states (X) array. It cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
Enter the array element that defines the input (or control) array for the
linear system. Entering an inputs (U) array is optional. The array must
be an inputs (U) array. If you enter an inputs (U) array, you must also
specify either a B input matrix, a D feedforward matrix, or both.
The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there
are elements in the inputs (U) array.
Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output
variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional.
If you enter an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C output
matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix elements
must have the same number of rows as there are elements in the outputs
(Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in
any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer
function.
IC Array Name
Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial
conditions for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The
IC array must have the same number of elements as the states (X) array
(equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not
specify an IC array, Adams/Solver initializes all states to zero.
Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix for
the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of
rows and columns), and it must have the same number of columns as the
number of rows in the states (X) array.
P - Z 483
Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation
Do the following:
Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the
linear system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows
as the A state matrix and the same number of columns as the number of
elements in the inputs (U) array.
Entering a B input matrix is optional. If you enter a B input matrix, you
must also include an inputs (U) array.
Enter the matrix data element that defines the output matrix for the
linear system. The C output matrix must have the same number of
columns as the A state matrix and the same number of rows as the
number of elements in the outputs (Y) array. Entering a C output matrix
is optional. If you enter a C output matrix, you must also include an
outputs (Y) array name.
D Feedforward Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the feed forward matrix for
the linear system. The D feedforward matrix must have the same
number of rows as the number of elements in the Y output array and the
same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U)
array.
When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a
Y output matrix and an inputs (U) array.
Static Hold
Select yes if you do not want the linear state equation states to change
during static and quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change.
For more information on holding values constant, see Controlling
Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements..
484 Adams/View
Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool
Constrains the marker of one part so that it remains perpendicular to the z-axis of a second part as shown
below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle
indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.
The marker of the first part can rotate about two axes with respect to the second part.
Learn:
About Joint Primitives
P - Z 485
Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be connected.
Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If there is only
one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to that part and
ground.
2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints to
Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Geometry Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid,
if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
486 Adams/View
Picture of Marker and Node Table
P - Z 487
PID Controller
PID Controller
Build Controls Toolkit Standard Control Blocks New/Modify
The PID controller creates a general proportional-integral-derivative control block. Two inputs are
necessary for this block: the proportional input and the derivative input. You must specify the derivative
state for input to this block that is consistent with the proportional state. For example, if the proportional
input is the measured x position of a part, the derivative input should be the linear velocity in the x
direction.
This block automatically creates the integrated state of the proportional input for use as the integrated
input. You can parameterize the P, I, and D gains of this block with an Adams/View real design variable
to quickly study the effect of changing control gains.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input
Deriviative Input
P Gain
I Gain
D Gain
Initial Condition
488 Adams/View
Planar Joint Tool
Creates a planar joint that allows a plane on one part to slide and rotate in the plane of another part. The
location of the planar joint determines a point in space through which the joints plane of motion passes.
The orientation vector of the planar joint is perpendicular to the joints plane of motion. The rotational
axis of the planar joint, which is normal to the joints plane of motion, is parallel to the orientation vector.
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
P - Z 489
Planar Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint and
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains fixed
on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should
use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded
view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of these options,
see Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Geometry
Feature
490 Adams/View
Plane Tool
Plane Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Plane Tool
Creates a two-dimensional box. You can draw a planes length and width in the plane of the screen or the
Working grid, if it is turned on. You will find planes most useful when you are creating contact forces
between objects, as explained in Contacts.
When you create a plane, you can select to create a new part consisting of the plane geometry or add the
plane geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed
of only wire geometry.
Learn about Creating Two-Dimensional Plane.
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds plane to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the plane to ground.
Tip:
Notes on Modifying Planes: One hotpoint appears after you draw the plane. It lets you modify the length
and height of the plane. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
P - Z 491
Plate Tool
Plate Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Plate Tool
Creates a plate, which is an extruded polygon solid with rounded corners. You create a plate by indicating
the location of its corners. You must select at least three locations. The first location you select acts as an
anchor point defining the position and orientation of the plate in space. The Plate tool creates markers at
each location. The marker at the anchor point is called the reference marker.
After you indicate the locations, the Plate tool creates a polygon with the specified number of sides and
extrudes it. By default, it creates the plate with a depth that is 1 and has corners with radii of 1 in current
length units. Before drawing, you can also specify the thickness and radius of the corners of the plate.
Note:
The reference marker of the plate determines the plate orientation and defines the plane of
the plate to its x and y axes. Adams/View defines the x and y axes of the reference marker
using the working grid, if it is turned on, or the view screen. Adams/View defines the plate
vertices as the component of distance from the reference marker to the vertex marker as
defined along the reference marker's y-axis. Therefore, if you choose a plate vertex marker
that is out-of-plane from the xy plane of the reference marker, the vertex marker is not the
actual plate vertex.
492 Adams/View
Plate Tool
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds plate to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the plate to ground.
Tip:
Thickness
Radius
Note:
After you draw a plate, a hotpoint appears at the reference marker. It lets you change the
depth of the plate. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry
You can also use the Geometry Modify Shape Plate dialog box to change the markers used
to define the plate, the thickness of the plate, and the radius of the corners of the plate.
P - Z 493
Plot Design Evaluation Results
Do the following:
Result Set
Enter the name of the parametric analysis result set you want to plot.
Create plot of
measure/objective value vs.
run
494 Adams/View
Plots Transfer Function
Displays a plot of the transfer function you created using the Create/Modify Transfer Function dialog box.
Learn more about Creating and Modifying Transfer Functions.
P - Z 495
Plots Transfer Function
Do the following:
Select the type of plot to display:
Magnitude - The magnitude of the transfer function element's
frequency response.
Phase Angle - Phase of the transfer function element's frequency
response.
Real Part - Real part of the frequency response of the transfer function
element.
Imaginary Part - Imaginary part of the frequency response of the
Min
Set the minimum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to
enable the Redraw button.
Max
Set the maximum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to
enable the Redraw button.
Scale
Select either:
log - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the
same distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are
equally spaced.
lin - Displays the axis values linearly, starting at 0.
Redraw
Redraws the plot after you change the scale of the plot.
496 Adams/View
Plugin Manager
Plugin Manager
Tools Plugin Manager
Manages the add-on modules or plugins to Adams/View, which expand its functionality. The MSC
plugins include Adams/Vibration, Adams/Controls, and Adams/Durability. The Plugin Manager lets you
run these products from within Adams/View and set Adams/View to load them automatically when you
start up. It also lets you unload them while in your current session of Adams/View, and view whether or
not there is a license available to run them.
Learn about Loading and Unloading Plugins.
Do the following:
Name
Load
To load a plugin, next to the name of the plugin, select Yes. To unload a plugin,
clear the selection of Yes.
Load at Startup
To load a plugin automatically at startup, next to the name of the plugin, select Yes.
To not have the plugin load automatically, clear the selection of Yes.
Description
Version
Author
Displays the company that published the plugin selected in the Name column.
License
Displays the number of total licenses of the plugin selected in the Name column,
and how many of those licenses are available. A license must be available for you
to load the plugin.
P - Z 497
Point Motion
Point Motion
Right-click point motion Modify
Do the following:
Name
Moving Point
Change the marker that defines the location of the motion on the parts. Learn
About Point Motion.
Reference Point
Change the marker that defines the orientation of the motion on the parts.
Direction
Define Using
Enter how you want to define the motion. Select Function to define using a
numerical value or Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.
Function
If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following in the
Function (time) text box that appears:
Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in
radians.)
Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the
More button
to display the Function Builder.
Parameters and ID
Routine
Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine MOTSUB.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Type
Displacement IC and
Velocity IC
Enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The text boxes that
appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
498 Adams/View
Point Motion/Joint Motion
Modifies either a Point Motion or a Joint motion. Its title and options change depending on the type of
motion. Select a motion below for more information on the options available:
Point Motion
Joint Motion
P - Z 499
Point Tool
Point Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Point Tool
Defines locations in three-dimensional space upon which you can build your model. Points allow you to
build parameterization between objects, as well as position objects. For example, you can attach a link to
points so that each time you move the points, the links geometry changes accordingly.
You can also use points to define the location where modeling objects connect, such as the point where
a joint connects two parts. Points do not define an orientation, only a location.
As you create a point, you define whether Adams/View should add it to ground or to another part. In
addition, you specify whether other parts near the same location should be attached (parameterized) to
the point. If you attach other bodies to the point, then the location of those bodies is tied to the location
of that point. As you change the location of the point, the location of all attached bodies change
accordingly.
Note:
You should not attach a parts center of mass marker to a point, however. If you attach a
center of mass marker, Adams/View removes the parameterization whenever it recomputes
the center of a part, unless you defined mass properties for the part.
Learn about:
Creating Points
Parameterization
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds point to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the point to ground.
Tip:
Don't Attach/Attach
Near
Don't Attach - Keep other objects surrounding the point unattached to the
point. There will be no parameterization relationship set up.
Attach Near - Attach other nearby objects to the point. When you change the
location of the points, the other objects locations and orientations update
accordingly.
500 Adams/View
Point Tool
Note:
After creating the point, you can modify its name and set its location using the Table Editor.
Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
P - Z 501
Point-Curve Constraint Tool
The point-curve constraint restricts a fixed point defined on one part to lie on a curve defined on a second
part. The first part is free to roll and slide on the curve that is fixed to a second part. The curve on the
second part can be planar or spatial or open or closed. The first part cannot lift off the second part; it must
always lie on the curve. A point-curve constraint removes two translational Degrees of freedom from
your model.
When you specify the location of the point-curve constraint on the first part, Adams/View creates a
marker at that location. The marker is called the I marker. The I marker can only translate in one direction
relative to the curve. The I marker, however, is free to rotate in all three directions.
You can use the point-curve constraint to model a Pin-in-slot mechanism or a Simple Cam Follower
mechanism where a lever arm is articulated by the profile of a revolving cam.
When modeling a pin-in-slot mechanism, the point-curve constraint keeps the center of the pin in the
center of the slot, while allowing it to move freely along the slot and rotate in the slot.
Learn more about:
Point-Curve Constraints
Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints
Do the following:
Select whether you are defining the point-curve constraint along a curve or an edge
of a part:
Curves - Splines, chains, and data-element curves are all considered
curves.
Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For
example, you can use a Parasolid object representing a cam that you
imported into Adams/View.
502 Adams/View
Point-to-Point Measure
Point-to-Point Measure
Select object Build Measure Point-to-Point Create/Modify
Measures kinematic characteristics, such as displacement or velocity, between two locations on a model
during a Simulation.
Learn more about:
Point-to-Point Measures
Methods for Creating Point-to-Point Characteristics
About Simulation Output
Do the following:
Measure Name
To Point
From Point
Characteristic
Component
Cartisian/Cylindrical/Spherical
Represent Coordinates in
Specify:
A marker along whose axes the measure will be represented.
Leave blank to represent in the ground reference frame.
Do time derivatives in
P - Z 503
Polyline Tool
Polyline Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Polyline Tool
Creates single- and multi-line segments (polylines) and create open or closed polylines (polygons)
Before drawing lines or polylines, you can specify the length of the line or lines to be created so you can
quickly create perfectly sized lines and polylines.
When creating a single line, you can also specify the angle of the line. The angle you specify is relative
to the x-axis of the global coordinate system or the working grid, if it is turned on. When you create line
geometry, you can select to create a new part consisting of the line geometry or add the line geometry to
an existing part. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed of only wire geometry. You
can extrude the lines into solid geometry that has mass. For more information, see Extruding Construction
Geometry Along a Path.
Do the following:
Tip:
Polyline/One Line
Select either:
Polyline - Creates a line made up of multiple lines.
One Line - Creates a single line.
504 Adams/View
Polyline Tool
Do the following:
Length
Set the length of the single line or the individual lines making up the
polyline. This should give you greater control.
Angle
Set the angle of the line. If you set the angle for a polyline, Adams/View
creates all the lines making up the polyline at the same angle.
Closed
Note:
Adams/View places hotpoints at the endpoint of each line segment after you draw the
objects. The hotpoints let you reshape the lines. If you create a closed polyline,
Adams/View maintains it as a closed polyline regardless of how you move the hotpoints.
For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to
Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also use the line or polyline modify dialog box to more accurately place the points
that make up the line or polyline. You can also read in location points from a file. For more
information, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location
Table.
P - Z 505
Precision Move
Precision Move
Edit Move
Learn about Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box.
Option
Description
Rotate Y, X, Z
Translate Y, X, Z
Relocate the
506 Adams/View
Precision Move
Option
Relative to/About the
Description
Select to define the coordinate system whose axes are to be used for
defining rotations and translations. For rotations:
Relative to rotates objects in place (their locations do not change) and
their rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the
Relative to the text box.
About the rotates the objects rotate about the origin of the coordinate
system specified (their locations change) and the rotations are with
respect to the coordinate system specified in the About the text box.
Translations are with respect to the coordinate system defined as either
Relative to the or the About the.
Model/Part/Marker/Vie
w/Entity/Screen
By default, the Precision Move dialog box moves the selected objects
relative to the default coordinate system. You can specify that Adams/View
use a different coordinate system as the reference coordinate system. The
rotational and translational coordinates you enter for the move or the
incremental values you select are with respect to the origin and orientation
of this coordinate system.
You can select the following types of objects:
Model - Global coordinate system.
Part or marker - Part or marker in your model.
View - Adams/View defined View, such as front, right, or left. Use the
relative to the screen, the Precision Move dialog box changes the dials
on the left to those shown in this picture. The dials translate and rotate
the objects:
Think of the translation as pulling the object in the direction of the
arrow. For example, when you select the small arrow that points
up, you pull an object up along the vertical axis. The double arrows
to the right translate an object along an axis that is normal to the
screen (works only if the view is in perspective mode).
Think of the rotation as pushing on an object at that point. For
example, if you select the arrow that points to the right, you are
pushing the horizontal axis back, resulting in a positive rotation
around the vertical axis.
P - Z 507
Precision Move
Option
C1 - C3
Description
Enter the coordinates to which you want to move an object relative to
another objects coordinate system (the reference coordinate system). You
specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to the and About
the options.
Enter the coordinates in the default coordinate system (Cartesian,
spherical, or cylindrical).
Load
508 Adams/View
Print
Print
Adams/PostProcessor File Print
You can print pages directly to a printer or store them in a file for printing at a later time.
Note:
Adams/PostProcessor only prints the portion of a report or table that fits on the paper.
To print a multi-page report, open the report in a browser and print from there.
To print a multi-page table, export the table in HTML format, open the report in a
browser, and print from there. Pages with only reports and tables on them print
significantly faster than pages with mixed views (for example, plot and report),
depending on the type of printer being used.
Do the following:
Select either:
Printer:
On Linux, in the Print to area, select Printer and enter an operating system
command to execute the print job (for example, lpr -Psp2 or lp -c -Ppd1).
On Windows, select also show Windows print dialog to display the
default Windows printer dialog box from which you can select a printer.
The dialog box appears after you select OK.
File:
In the Print to area, select File and enter the location and name of the file
If you select jpg format, you can set the level of quality.
(A)Paper Size
Select the size of paper, or to accept the current default paper for the printer, select
default.
Landscape
Portrait
P - Z 509
Print
Do the following:
Select if you want the page to print in black and white.
If you select Black and White, Adams/PostProcessor prints all colors in black and
the background in white even if you are using a color printer.
Selecting black and white is generally considered more readable for presentations,
but you should use altering line style or line thickness to distinguish between the
curves on the plot.
Color
Current Page
All Pages
Page Range
Select to print specific pages and enter the first page and last page.
510 Adams/View
Range Measure
Range Measure
Build Measure Range New/Modify
Creates range measures with which you can obtain statistical feedback about any existing measure.
Ranges dynamically calculate the maximum, minimum, average, or variation characteristics of any
measure.
Learn about Range Measures.
Do the following:
Measure Name
Type
Of Measure
P - Z 511
Reading a Command File
512 Adams/View
Rename
Rename
Database Navigator Rename
Do the following:
Text box
Enter the new name for the object you selected in the tree list.
Apply
P - Z 513
Rename Dialog Box
Do the following:
Enter a new name for your dialog box.
514 Adams/View
Rename Object
Rename Object
Edit Rename
Lets you rename any object in your Modeling database. You can change the default name assigned to the
object but you cannot change its full name.
Learn About Object Naming.
Do the following:
Enter the name you want to assign to the object.
Select to display the Database Navigator and rename another object in the
database.
P - Z 515
Results (.res) Content
Selecting Results (.res) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the
content of the results file.
Select the options for the content you want in the results file.
516 Adams/View
Results (.res) Options
Selecting Results (.res) Options as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the
format of the results file.
For the option:
Do the following:
Comment
Format
You cannot view a binary file nor can you move it to different computer
platforms. It, however, provides greater precision, faster access, and
more compact size than a standard Adams/View text file.
ASCII - Standard Adams/View text file with no formatting.
XML - XML is a license-free, platform-independent file format used
Specify how many digits are written after the decimal point for real numbers.
The default value is 17 decimal places (full precision for recovery of doubleprecision numbers).
Round Off
Set to On to turn on the roundoff feature for real numbers (the default is
disabled). The Significant digits option controls the actual numbers of digits
retained during rounding off.
Scientific Notation
Specify the boundaries at which the format for real numbers switches from a
fixed point format to scientific notation. The values are exponents for the base
ten. The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that any number less than or equal
to 1.0E-04 or greater than or equal to 1.0E+05 will be written in scientific
notation.
P - Z 517
Results (.res) Options
Do the following:
Specify a positive integer that defines the number of spaces added at the left of
each level of hierarchy in the XML data structure. The default is zero spaces to
minimize the file size, but provides the lowest level Kof readability. The
following shows an example of a portion of an XML file when Shift Width is set
to 3.
------------------------------------xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Results>
< Analysis>
< ModelInfo title="model_1" />
< Units angle="deg" length="mm" mass="kg" time="sec"
/>
...
Significant digits
Specify how many significant figures of a real number are retained during round
off (when round off is enabled). The default is to use ten significant figures. This
number is distinct from the number of places actually printed for a real number,
which the Decimal Places option controls. Significant Figures includes digits to
the left and right of the decimal point.
Trailing Zeros
Set to On to specify that trailing zeros are printed for real numbers. The default
is not to print trailing zeros. When enabled, all the digits after the decimal point
will be printed, whether they are zero or not. When disabled, any zeros at the end
of the fractional part of the number will be dropped, leaving the last digit as a
non-zero digit.
Zero Threshold
Enter the zero threshold value for numbers being written to an output file. If a
number has an absolute value smaller than the zero threshold value, then it will
be written out as zero. This value is independent of units.
518 Adams/View
Revolute Joint Tool
Creates a revolute joint that allows the rotation of one part with respect to another part about a common
axis. The revolute joint can be located anywhere along the axis about which the joints parts can rotate
with respect to each other.
The orientation of the revolute joint defines the direction of the axis about which the joints parts can
rotate with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the revolute joint is parallel to the orientation
vector and passes through the location.
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
P - Z 519
Revolute Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Geometry Feature
520 Adams/View
Revolution Tool
Revolution Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Revolution Tool
Creates geometry by revolving a profile. You specify the profile and the axis about which to revolve the
profile. The Revolution tool revolves the profile around the axis in a counterclockwise direction (righthand rule)
You can create an open or closed revolution. If you create a closed revolution, the Revolution tool closes
the profile by drawing a line segment between the profiles first and last points and creates a solid
revolution from this profile. If you leave the revolution open, the Revolution tool creates a skin that has
no mass properties.
You can also select to create the revolution using the Non-analytical Method or Analytical Method.
Learn about Creating a Revolution.
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the revolution to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the revolution to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence
the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car
driving around a race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be
added to ground.
Create by Picking
Select:
Points to select the locations on the screen that define the profile.
Curve to select the curve to be used to define the profile.
P - Z 521
Revolution Tool
Do the following:
Closed
Select to create a closed revolution. (Available only when you set Create
by Picking to Points.)
Analytical
Select to create a revolution using the analytical method. Clear to use the
non-analytical method
Note:
After you draw a revolution, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to
create the revolution, the hotpoints appear at the vertexes of the profile. If you used the
analytical method, hotpoints appear at points along the curves that define the revolution.
The hotpoints let you resize and reshape the revolution. For more information on
modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also use the revolution modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that
make up the profile and read in location points from a file. For more information, see Using
Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location Table.
522 Adams/View
Rotational Motion Tool
Rotates the first part that the joint connects about the z-axis of a second part. The right-hand rule
determines the sign of the motion. The z-axis of the first part must be aligned with the z-axis of the second
part at all times. The angle is zero when the x-axis of the first part is also aligned with the x-axis of the
second part.
Learn about:
Overview of Motion
Creating Joint Motion
Do the following:
Specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By
default, creates a rotational motion with a speed of 30 degrees per second.
To enter a function expression or User-written subroutine, right-click the
Rot. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression
Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on
using the Function Builder, see Function Builder and Adams/View Function
Builder online help.
P - Z 523
Save Binary Notebook As
In stand-alone mode, Adams/PostProcessor saves your current session in notebooks, which are binary
files that store all the simulation results, animations, and plots that you are working on. You can also save
a copy of a notebook with a different name or in a different location. When you save a notebook,
Adams/Posrocessor saves all the pages you created and their content. It also saves the simulation results
in the binary file. The results are not associated with the files you imported.
Do the following:
Enter a name for the notebook.
To save the document in a different directory, right-click the File Name text box,
select Browse, and then select the desired directory.
524 Adams/View
Save Database
Save Database
File Save Database
Alerts you that Adams/View is saving the current Modeling database as an Adams/View binary file and
asks you if you want to create a backup file. To save the model data in another format, see the File Export
dialog box.
Learn about Modeling Database.
Do the following:
Yes - Creates a backup file of the existing database file and saves the
P - Z 525
Save Database As
Save Database As
File Save Database As
Saves the current Modeling database to a binary file with a new name. This lets you keep several versions
of your database under different names and reduces the risk of losing your work if you inadvertently
change or delete your model. Saving your modeling database saves all modeling information, including
any customization changes you made.
To save the model data in another format, export the data as explained Exchanging Data in Adams. To
save your preferences, see Saving and Restoring Settings.
Do the following:
Specify the name you want to assign to the file.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
526 Adams/View
Save Design Evaluation Results
Do the following:
Enter a name for the analysis.
Auto-Increment Name Select if you want Adams/View to add a unique number at the end of the
name. Adams/View copies the current parametric results to a new analysis
with the name you specify.
P - Z 527
Save Model at Simulation Position
Saves the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name so you can use it
as your new design configuration.
Learn about Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model.
Do the following:
New Model
Analysis
Frame
Enter the frame number of the configuration you want to save to a new model.
528 Adams/View
Save Run Results
Saves the results of the last Simulation under a new name so that you can animate or plot the results at a
later time. Saving simulation results is particularly important when you want to compare the results from
several design variations.
Be sure to save your Modeling database after you save your simulation results (File Save Database).
Note:
By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the modeling database, not to
external Adams/Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams/Solver analysis
files, set the simulation output before you run the simulation, as explained in Setting
Simulation Controls. To export the results to analysis files, see Export - Adams/Solver
Analysis Files.
Do the following:
Enter the name for the simulation results.
Auto-Increment Name Select if you want Adams/View to automatically increment the run names
when you save subsequent simulations.
P - Z 529
Screw Joint Tool
Creates a screw joint that specifies the rotation of one part about an axis, as the part translates along the
axis with respect to a second part.
The screw joint does not require that the two parts remain parallel with respect to the axis of rotation and
translation. However, the z-axis of the coordinate system marker on the first part and the z-axis of the
coordinate system marker on the second part must always be parallel and co-directed. Although the screw
joint does not enforce this parallelism, the chain of parts and joints that connects the two markers should.
After you create a screw joint, you need to specify the pitch value. The pitch value is the distance from
one peak on a thread of the screw to the next thread. It defines the amount of translational displacement
of the first part for every rotation of the second part about the axis of rotation.
By default, Adams/View sets the pitch value to 1. The pitch value is in length units. A positive pitch
creates a right-hand thread, and a negative pitch creates a left-hand thread.
530 Adams/View
Screw Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see about Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Feature
P - Z 531
Scripted Simulation
Scripted Simulation
Simulate Scripted
532 Adams/View
Scripted Simulation
Icon
Description
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify
your model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.
You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to
continue simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation
and continue.
Shortcut: Double-click the Select tool.
Stops any further processing, and the modeling objects appear in the
positions that Adams/Solver last successfully calculated.
Starts the Simulation.
model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the
animation, Adams/View animates the model up to the last simulation
step and leaves your model there.
If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration before you run the
Simulation.
Interactive/Scripted
P - Z 533
Scripted Simulation
Icon
Description
Save/Delete Simulation Results
Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can
Displays Adams/PostProcessor.
Simulation Settings...
Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the
Simulation performed.
534 Adams/View
Second-Order Filter Block
The second-order filter block creates a second-order filter by specifying the undamped natural frequency
and the damping ratio. You can parameterize the undamped natural frequency or damping ratio constant
with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the frequency or damping
ratio of the associated block.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input
Natural
Frequency
Damping Ratio
P - Z 535
Select List
Select List
Database Navigator Select List
Allows you to view objects that you've selected. You can also add and remove objects from the select list.
Learn about:
Managing the Select List
Showing , Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator
Do the following:
Add
Remove
Clear All
536 Adams/View
Select List Manager
Lets you view objects youve selected and add to and remove objects from the select list. You can add
and remove objects based on their name, type, group, and parent.
Learn more about Selecting Objects.
Do the following:
Object Name
Enter the name of the object that you want to add, and then select the
Add button next to the text box.
Add
Select to add the object in the Object Name text box to the select list.
Name Filter
Enter the name of the objects that you want to add to or remove from
the select list. Type any wildcards that you want included. For
example, to remove all objects that contain a particular character,
such as an h.
Type Filter
Set to the type of object or objects that you want to add or remove.
To display all the different object types, select Browse.
Scope
Expand Groups
Remove Objects
Clear All
Refresh
Select to update the list of objects in the Select List Manager window
so that it reflects any selections that you made using the mouse or
Shortcut menus.
Add
Select to add the object in objects to and from the select list based on
search criteria.
Remove
P - Z 537
Setting Screen and Printer Fonts
Changes the font Adams/View uses to display text in a view, such as the name of a part or a note on the
screen, or to print text to a printer. The fonts available for displaying text in a view are those available
with your operating system. The fonts available for printing text are a fixed set of 12 fonts.
Note:
Do the following:
Enter the name of the font you want Adams/View to use to display text in a view.
To browse for a font, right-click the text box, point to Browse, and then select a
font.
Postscript Font
538 Adams/View
Simulation Controls
Simulation Controls
Simulate Interactive/Scripted
Main toolbox Click
Displays tools for controlling Interactive Simulation and Scripted simulations. Select a topic below:
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Scripted Simulation
P - Z 539
Single-Component Force tool
Adams/View automatically defines the direction based on the line of sight between the two
locations. The direction is continuously updated during Simulation.
You cannot use the line-of-sight method if the two points that define the force will become coincident
during a simulation because the force direction becomes undefined. When running a simulation,
Adams/Solver warns you when the points become nearly coincident. The following shows an example
of a warning:
Caution:
The direction cosines for SFORCE model_1.FORCE_1 are invalid. This is usually caused
by a (nearly) zero length SFORCE or SPRINGDAMPER.
You can ignore the warning only if the computed force is zero when the points are coincident (for
example, when you are using a BISTOP function that is inactive when its markers are coincident).
Otherwise, having coincident points is a modeling error with unpredictable results.
Learn more about:
540 Adams/View
Single-Component Force tool
Single-Component Forces
Do the following:
Specify the number of parts and the nature of the force direction. You can
select the following:
Space Fixed
Body Moving
Two Bodies
Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
based on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the
Main toolbox to access the force tool.)
Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you, which, in
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:
Force Value
Translational C
P - Z 541
Single-Component Torque tool
Applies a rotational force to either one part or two about a specified axis. You specify the point of
application and the direction. The following figure shows an example of a single-component torque
applied to one part.
Do the following:
Specify the number of parts and the nature of the force direction. You can
select the following:
Space Fixed
Body Moving
Two Bodies
Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
542 Adams/View
Single-Component Torque tool
Do the following:
Specify the characteristics of the force:
Constant torque - Lets you enter a constant torque value or let
based on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the
Main toolbox to access the force tool.)
Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you, which, in
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:
Force Value
Translational C
P - Z 543
Single Point Motion Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the motion connected to parts:
1 location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see About Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Feature
544 Adams/View
Single Point Motion Tool
Do the following:
If you set Characteristic to Translational, specify the speed of the motion
in displacement units per second. By default, Adams/View creates a
translational motion with a speed of 10 millimeters per second.
To enter a function expression or user-written subroutine, right-click the
Trans. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression
Builder to display the Function Builder. For information on using the
Function Builder, see Function Builder and the Adams/View Function
Builder online help.
Rot. Speed
P - Z 545
Six-Component General Force tool
Creates rotational and translational force between two parts in your model using six orthogonal
components.
Learn more about:
Multi-Component Forces
Do the following:
Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Force, the following options appears:
Force and Torque
546 Adams/View
Six-Component General Force tool
Do the following:
C and CT
P - Z 547
Sizes
Sizes
Dialog-Box Builder Preferences Sizes
Displays the default size of a new interface object if you create it by clicking in the new dialog box or
container.
It does not display the size for the objects you created and modified by dragging the item to a desired size.
Learn more about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.
Do the following:
Default Height
Default Width
548 Adams/View
Snap Grid
Snap Grid
Dialog Box-Builder Preferences Snap Grid
Allows you to restrict the possible positions and sizes of your interface objects, similar to the Working
grid in the modeling window.
When you drag an item with the mouse to move or resize it, the mouse position will snap to the nearest
grid point. Because the snap grid points are not visible, and the default grid is very fine (2 pixel distance)
it is generally not very noticeable.
You can turn this option on or off in the Option menu in the Dialog-Box Builder.
Do the following:
Horizontal Grid Spacing Enter a value to set the horizontal distance between grid points.
Vertical Grid Spacing
Enter the number of pixels from the top left border to begin grip snaps.
P - Z 549
Solver Settings
Solver Settings
Settings Solver Dynamics/Kinematics/Equilibrium/Initial
Conditions/Executable/Display/Output/Optimizer/Debugging
Displays options for setting the Simulation depending on the command you selected:
Dynamics
Kinematics
Equillibrium
Initial Conditions
Executable
Display
Output
Pattern for Jacobian
Optimizer
Debugging
Contacts
Flexible Bodies
550 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Contacts
You can set default options for the performing three-dimensional contact operations.
Do the following:
Category
Set to Contacts.
Model
Geometry Library
P - Z 551
Solver Settings - Debugging
You can set default options for the debugging information that appears when you run a Simulation.
You can also turn on the display of Strip charts and step through a simulation. Learn more about
Debugging Your Model.
Do the following:
Category
Set to Debugging.
Debugger
Set to:
On - Turn on the Simulation Debugger
Off - Turn off the Simulation debugger
Display
Set to:
None - Displays no information.
Table - Displays the Debug table.
Highlighting - Highlights those objects experiencing the most error or the
objects. The objects highlighted are the same objects shown at the top of
the Element list in the Debug table.
Track Maximum
Set to track:
Error - Track objects with the largest equation residual error. This number
constraints.
Change - Track variables with the most change.
Acceleration - Track objects experiencing the greatest acceleration.
Select to display options for stepping through a simulation and displaying strip
charts.
552 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Debugging
Do the following:
Set to Yes to single step through a simulation. The Simulation Debugger pauses
after each simulation output step, time step, or iteration so you can closely inspect
the simulation behavior. You can step through a simulation with any of the other
debugger options selected, such as strip charts, tables, or object highlighting. As
you run a simulation, Adams/View displays a dialog box that gives you the option
to continue with the simulation or cancel it.
Display Stripchart Select the type of strip chart you want to display to provide you with insight into
the simulation.
Learn about the types of strip charts.
P - Z 553
Solver Settings - Display
Controls how Adams/View displays your model during a single Simulation or how it displays your model
during a parametric analysis. You can also set the information that Adams/View displays during a
parametric analysis.
Use the Solver Settings dialog box so you see just the amount of information you need during a
simulation. For example, when you perform a simulation on a new model, set up the display to see the
model change as the solution proceeds to determine if the simulation is working properly. Updating the
display of the model frequently can, however, slow down the overall solution process. Once your model
runs properly, change the options so Adams/View only updates the model at the end of the simulation.
You can even set Adams/View so it never updates the model. You can then play an animation of the
simulation, as required.
Do the following:
Category
Set to Display.
Show Messages
If you are running Adams/Solver externally, set to Yes to display the messages that
Adams/Solver generates into an Information window. The messages include the
diagnostic messages that Adams/Solver generates during a simulation, as well as
warnings and errors, which are always displayed. Adams/View displays all
messages output during a simulation to the message window and to its Log file.
554 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Display
Do the following:
Set to one of the options below to indicate when you want your model updated
during the simulation. The options are listed from option that sets the fewest
updates to the option that sets the most.
Never - No updates. Use this option only when you are sure that your
simulation.
At Output Step - Update your model display at every output time step
that you specified when you submitted your simulation and omit any
contact steps. Because it does not display contact steps, your simulation
time may improve because the graphical processing operations will not be
burdened with intermediate contact events.
At Contact/Output Step - Update the model display at each output time
most useful when debugging static simulations because they are purely
iterative in nature since there is no integration required. This option is also
available for dynamic simulations, in which case Adams/View displays
the model at every corrector step associated with each predictor step.
Using the At Every Iteration option with dynamic simulations can result
in significantly longer simulation times.
Icons
To see all your model icons as your model is updated, set to On. Keeping your
icons on as your model is updated can help you understand how model objects
behave, especially constraints and forces. By default, icons are not visible during
animations.
More
Prompt
Set to Yes to indicate that you want to be prompted whether or not Adams/View
should display each updated frame. By default, there is no delay and you are not
prompted to display each updated frame.
Time Delay
Enter the number of seconds Adams/View should pause after displaying each
updated frame so you can study it. By default, there is no delay.
P - Z 555
Solver Settings - Display
Do the following:
Update Toolbar
Select an option to set how Adams/View should update the simulation information
that appears in the status bar as the solution proceeds. The options are a subset of
the options available under the Update Graphics pull-down menu and behave in a
similar way.
Chart Objective
Select to display a strip chart of the following depending on the type of parametric
analysis:
Objective value versus variable value for a Design study.
Objective value versus trial for a Design of experiments (DOE).
Objective value versus iteration number for an Optimization.
Displays a strip chart for each design variable, plotting its value versus the trial or
iteration number. Adams/View updates the strip chart every trial or iteration.
Save Curves
Clears all displayed measures at the beginning of the parametric analysis and
automatically saves the curve from each trial or iteration. If you do not select Save
Curves, Adams/View does not clear or save any curves. It only displays the curve
for the current simulation and any curves you previously saved.
Show Report
tool
to display this table at any time, write it to a file, and control its format
(see Generating a Table).
556 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Dynamic
Dynamic simulations are transient or time-varying simulations used to investigate the movements of parts
over time; these movements result from the combined effects of forces and constraint relationships. You
can perform dynamic simulations on models that have any number of Degrees of freedom (DOF).
It is computationally more efficient, however, to perform Kinematic simulations on models with zero DOF
and to perform dynamic simulations only on models with one or more DOF. For dynamic simulations,
Adams/Solver can use several numerical algorithms to calculate an approximate solution to the equations
of motion it formulates for your mechanical system.
Learn more About Dynamic Simulations.
Do the following:
Category
Set to Dynamic.
Integrator
Select an integrator (the integrators HASTIFF, HHT and Newmark are only available
with Adams/Solver (C++)).
For more on the integrators, see Comparison of Integrators and the:
INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) online help
INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver (C++) help
Note:
Formulation
P - Z 557
Solver Settings - Dynamic
Do the following:
Specify the corrector algorithm that is to be used with the stiff integrators GSTIFF,
WSTIFF, or Constant BDF. The corrector in a stiff integrator ensures that all the
unknowns satisfy the equations of the system. The two algorithms, original and
modified, differ primarily in the algorithm that they use to define when the corrector
iterative process has converged.
Original - Specifies that the corrector available in the previous releases of
Specify the relative and absolute local integration error tolerances that the integrator
must satisfy at each step. For BDF, HHT, and Newmark integrators, Adams/Solver
monitors the integration errors in the displacement and state variables that the other
differential equations (differential equations, linear state equations, general state
equations, and transfer functions) define. ABAM, SI1, and SI2 formulations also
monitor errors in velocity variables. The larger the error, the greater the error per
integration step in your solution.
Note that the value for error is units-sensitive. For example, if a system is modeled in
mm-kg-s units, the units of length must be in mm. Assuming that all the translational
states are larger than 1 mm, setting ERROR=1E-3 implies that the integrator
monitors all changes of the order of 1 micron.
The error tolerances (e) are enforced as:
|| Yc - Y || < MAX (e, e * ||Y||)
where:
Yc is the column matrix of computed values for the unknowns, Y.
The symbol || . || indicates the root-mean-square of the array of numbers.
558 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Dynamic
Do the following:
Enter the maximum time step that the integrator is allowed to take.
When setting the Interpolate option, the integration step size is limited to the value
that is specified for Hmax. If Hmax is not defined, no limit is placed on the
integration step size. If you do not set the Interpolate option, the maximum step size
is limited to the output step.
Range is 0 < Hmin
Note:
Hinit
Hmax.
In the dialog box, click More to see Interpolate, Hinit, and Hmin options.
More
Hmin
Specify the minimum time step that the integrator is allowed to take.
Default is 1.0E-6*HMAX for GSTIFF and WSTIFF integrators, and machine
precision for ABAM, SI1, and SI2 formulations and HHT and Newmark integrators.
Range is 0 < HMIN
Hinit
HINIT
HMAX.
Enter the initial time step that the integrator attempts. The default is 1/20 of the output
step.
Range is 0 < HMIN
HINIT
HMAX.
P - Z 559
Solver Settings - Dynamic
Do the following:
All of the BDF integrators (GSTIFF, WSTIFF, HASTIFF and Constant BDF) use
Newton-Raphson iterations to solve the nonlinear Differential-Algebraic equations
of motion. This iteration process is referred to as correcting the solution. The
adaptivity value modifies the corrector error tolerance to include a term that is
inversely proportional to the integration step size. This is intended to loosen the
corrector tolerance when the step size gets small (many corrector failures occur
because of small step size). If the integration step size is equal to h, Adaptivity/h is
added to the corrector tolerance.
When setting a value for Adaptivity, begin with a small number, such as 1E-8. Note
that this relaxes the tolerance of the corrector, which can introduce additional error
into the dynamic solution. The corrector tolerance must be at least a factor of 10
stricter than the integration tolerance. The ratio advocated in theoretical literature
ranges from .1 to .001 and is a function of the integrator order and step size. The ratio
that Adams/Solver uses varies with the integrator chosen, but is within the range
specified above. If you use an Adaptivity value to relax the corrector tolerances, be
sure to validate your results by running another simulation using a different
integration error tolerance.
The Adaptivity value affects only the GSTIFF, WSTIFF, and Constant BDF
integrators.
An Adaptivity value is typically required to overcome corrector convergence
difficulties and you should not use it in normal situations.
The default is 0, and the range is Adaptivity
Interpolate
0.
Set to Yes when you don't want the integrator to control the integration step-size to
precisely hit an output step. The integrator might then overshoot an output point and
in this case an interpolation algorithm will provide an approximation of the solution
at the output point. This approximate is then refined to provide for the consistent
solution at the output point.
560 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Dynamic
Do the following:
Specify the maximum order that the integrator can use. The order of integration refers
to the order of the polynomials used in the solution. The integrator controls the order
of the integration and the step size, and, therefore, controls the local integration error
at each step so that it is less than the error tolerance specified.
For problems involving discontinuities, such as contacts, setting Kmax to 2 can
improve the speed of the solution. However, we do not recommend that you set the
Kmax option unless you are a very experienced user. Any modification can adversely
affect the integrators accuracy and robustness.
Kmax's default and range depend on the integrator you selected:
For the
integrator:
ABAM
12
Kmax
12
GSTIFF,
WSTIFF,
HASTIFF,
Constant
BDF
Kmax
RKF45,
HHT,
Newmark
Not
applicable
Not applicable
Note:
Maxit
The
default is:
Enter the maximum number of iterations allowed for the Newton-Raphson iterations
to converge to the solution of the nonlinear equations. The correctors in GSTIFF and
WSTIFF use the Newton-Raphson iterations. ABAM also uses Newton-Raphson
iterations to solve for the dependent coordinates.
We recommend that you do not set Maxit larger than 10. This is because round-off
errors start becoming large when a large number of iterations are taken. This can
cause an error in the solution.
The default is 10, and the range is Maxit > 0.
P - Z 561
Solver Settings - Dynamic
Do the following:
Enter the sum of the relative and absolute error tolerances. If T is the sum of the
relative and absolute error tolerances applied to the state vector, then the following
tolerance is applied:
r1 * T to the translational displacements
r2 * T to the angular displacements
r3 * T to the modal coordinates
The scale applies to only WSTIFF and ABAM. It is does not apply to GSTIFF and
Constant BDF. The use of scale factors is not supported in Adams/Solver (C++).
Beta
One of the two defining coefficients associated with the Newmark method. Learn
more about the Newmark integrator with INTEGRATOR statement help.
Default value is 0.36.
Range is defined in conjunction with Gamma. Together they must satisfy the stability
condition.
Gamma
One of the two (together with Beta) defining coefficients associated with the
Newmark method.
Default value is 0.7.
Range is defined in conjunction with Beta. Together they must satisfy the stability
condition.
Alpha
562 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Equilibrium
Specifies error tolerances and other parameters for Static equilibrium and Quasi-static simulations.
A static or quasi-static equilibrium analysis is appropriate only when inertia forces, such as, dAlembert
forces, are not important and the system has one or more Degrees of freedom (degrees of freedom after
Adams/Solver has removed any redundant constraints). Static and quasi-static equilibrium simulations
solve for displacement and static forces, but not for velocity, acceleration, or inertia forces, which are all
assumed to be zero.
P - Z 563
Solver Settings - Equilibrium
To set the Jacobian matrix for dynamic simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.
Do the following:
Category
Set to Equilibrium.
Equilibrium Type
Select either:
Static - Performs a static equilibrium operation. Learn more.
Dynamic - Performs a dynamic simulation to find the static equilibrium.
Learn more
Tlimit
Specifies the maximum translational increment allowed per iteration during static
simulations performed using static simulations.
The default is 20 and the range is Tlimit > 0.
Alimit
Specifies the maximum angular increment allowed per iteration. The default is 10
degrees, and the range is Alimit > 0. Enter the value in the current modeling units
(degrees by default).
Maxit
Stability
Specifies the fraction of the mass and damping matrices Adams/Solver adds to the
stiffness matrix. Adding a fraction of the mass and damping matrices to the
stiffness matrix can stabilize the iteration process and prevent the iteration from
diverging. Often the stiffness matrix is singular for a system because the system is
neutrally stable (for example, the system moves in certain directions without
affecting the potential energy). Adding a fraction of the mass and damping
matrices to the stiffness matrix removes this singularity and makes it possible to
solve for equilibrium positions. The value of Stability does not affect the accuracy
of the solution, but it does affect the rate of convergence of the iteration process.
The default is 1.0E-05 and the range is Stability > 0.
Imbalance
564 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Equilibrium
Do the following:
Select either:
1. ORIGINAL, for running only the ORIGINAL Solver
2. ADVANCED, runs, in order, the following methods until one shows
progress:
a. ORIGINAL
b. ORIGINAL+Krylov
c. ORIGINAL+UMF
d. Newton+Krylov
e. Tensor-Krylov block-3
f. Tensor-Krylov block-2+
3. AGGRESSIVE, runs, in order, the following methods until one shows
progress:
a. ORIGINAL
b. ORIGINAL+Krylov
c. ORIGINAL+UMF
d. Newton+Krylov
e. Tensor-Krylov block-3
f. Tensor-Krylov block-2+
g. Broyden-Armijo
h. Trust-Region
4. ALL, runs, in order, all the available methods, until one shows progress:
a. ORIGINAL
b. ORIGINAL+Krylov
c. ORIGINAL+UMF
d. Newton+Krylov
e. Tensor-Krylov block-3
f. Tensor-Krylov block-2+
g. Broyden-Armijo
h. Trust-Region
i. Hooke-Jeeves
P - Z 565
Solver Settings - Equilibrium
Do the following:
Specify the relative tolerance value.
For all solvers, except ORIGINAL and ORIGINAL+Krylov, the tolerance is
defined as : TOL=ATOL+||xIC||*RTOL.
For ORIGINAL and ORIGINAL+Krylov solvers the tolerance is equal to ERROR.
The default is 0.0 and the range is
Maxitl
Specifies the maximum number of allowed inner loops in all the solvers, except
ORIGINAL, ORIGINAL+Krylov and ORIGINAL+UMF. For Hooke-Jeeves
method, allowed budget of function evaluations is set to MAXITL*N, where N is
the size of the problem (number of unknowns).
The default is 40 and the range is maxit1 1.0 .
Etamax
Specify the maximum threshold for the error tolerance of the linear Krylov solver
(for Newton+Krylov and Tensor-Krylov methods), that solves the linear systems,
required by Krylov algorithm. Maximum error tolerance for residual in inner
iteration. The inner iteration terminates when the relative linear residual is smaller
than eta*| F(x_c) |. eta is determined by the modified Eisenstat-Walker formula if
etamax > 0. If etamax < 0, then eta = |etamax| for the entire iteration.
The default is 0.9 and the range is 0.0 etamax < 1.0 .
If you selected Aggressive or All, along with the above options (i.e Atol, Rtol, Maxitl and Etamax)
following additional options will also be available:
Eta
Specify the initial residual tolerance for the linear Krylov Solver for
Tensor_Krylov method. The Tensor-Krylov ETA parameter is maintained
adaptively by the Krylov algorithm but ETA is the indicated starting value, while
ETAMAX is the maximum threshold for ETA.
Default: 1.0e-4
Range: 0.0 < ETA < 1.0
Specify the dimensionless radius of the trust-region for Trust-region method. The
smaller the value, the more the refinement of Trust-region solution (hence more
work).
Range: 0.0 < ETA < 0.25
Specify the coefficient for global damping applied to all bodies during static
simulations performed using dynamic analyses.
The default is 0 and the range is Global Damping > 0.
566 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Equilibrium
Do the following:
Specify the maximum time allowed to reach equilibrium during static simulations
performed using dynamic analyses.
The default is 100 and the range is Settling Time > 0.
Acceleration Error Specify the maximum acceleration error allowed during static simulations
performed using dynamic analyses.
The default is 1.0E-02 and the range is Acceleration Error > 0.
Kinetic Energy
Error
Specify the maximum kinetic energy error allowed in static simulations performed
using dynamic analyses.
The default is 1.0E-02 and the range is Kinetic Energy Error > 0.
Note:
AND
Maximum (Relative State Errors) < Error
P - Z 567
Solver Settings - Flexible Bodies
Do the following:
Category
Model
Limit Check
skin to see whether they exceed the linear limit. To use this option,
MNF_FILE or DB_FILE need to be specified in FLEX_BODY statement.
Selnod - Adams/Solver C++ will only check the nodes specified in
The linear limit is defined as 10% of the characteristic length of the flexible
body. You can use CHAR_LEN in FLEX_BODY statement to specify the
characteristic length. If CHAR_LEN is not specified, Adams/Solver C++ will
calculate the characteristic length using MNF or MD DB if MNF_FILE or
DB_FILE is specified. Otherwise, Adams/Solver C++ issues a warning.
Limit Action
Select the action to be performed when flexible body exceeds its linear limit.
Halt - Terminates execution of Adams/Solver C++.
Return - Stops the simulation and returns to the command level.
Message Only - Issues a warning message only (Default).
568 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Executable
Do the following:
Category
Set to Executable.
Executable
Select:
Internal - Run Adams/Solver from within Adams/View and animate the
Adams/View, but without seeing the model update on your screen during
the simulation. Adams/View automatically plays an animation of the
simulation when the simulation is complete.
Write Files Only - Instruct Adams/View to write out the files that are
Set it to use the standard Adams/Solver executable (leave it blank) or a userdefined or customized Adams/Solver library. A customized Adams/Solver library
is required if you used subroutines to define any objects in your model, such as
motions or forces. For more information, see the following:
Adams/Solver help
Running and Configuring Adams
Note:
On Linux, you can use the Adams Toolbar to set the Adams/Solver
library to run and create different tools on the Adams Toolbar for each
library you have.
P - Z 569
Solver Settings - Executable
Do the following:
Select either:
FORTRAN - Our existing version of Adams/Solver.
C++ - Our new, C++-based version of Adams/Solver, which promises to
Set to yes to verify your model before running a simulation. See Model Verify Tool
dialog box help.
Hold License
Set whether or not the Adams/Solver license is checked back in once the
simulation is complete. By default, Adams/View does not check the license back
in for another user. You must exit Adams/View before other users can use the
Adams/Solver license.
If you set Hold License to Yes, then Adams/View checks out the
Adams/Solver.
After a parametric analysis (licenses are held throughout the
parametric analysis)
More
Select to display options for setting the remote computer on which to run
Adams/Solver.
570 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Executable
Do the following:
Linux only; not displayed when running on Windows
Enter the name of the remote host where you run Adams/Solver or leave
blank to use local machine. The option you select depends on where the
Adams/Solver is licensed at your site.
Note:
If you set Remote Compute to Yes, the following options are available:
Node Name
MDI Directory
Enter the name of the Adams/Solver installation directory on the remote machine.
Remote Directory Specify a directory that Adams/Solver uses to write out its files and search for
input files. The directory is optional. You need to specify it only if the users file
system is not automounted on the remote machine upon log in.
The following options are available for Adams/Solver (C++) only
Thread Count
Adams/Solver (C++)
Specify the number of parallel threads that Adams/Solver (C++) uses when
performing the simulation. The number of threads, n, must be an integer in the
range of 1 to 8. The default value is 1. By executing multiple threads in parallel
across multiple processors, Adams/Solver (C++) can reduce the walltime required
for a simulation.
Typically, the optimal number of threads is between N and 2N, where N is the
number of processors (including virtual processors in the case of Pentium
processors with HyperThreading enabled).
Learn more about Threaded (Parallel) Operation of Adams/Solver(C++).
P - Z 571
Solver Settings - IC (Initial Conditions)
Sets error tolerances and other parameters for an Initial conditions simulation. By default, the integrators
ABAM, WSTIFF, and DSTIFF reconcile integrator results to be consistent with constraints; GSTIFF
does not, unless you set Interpolate to Yes in Solver Settings - Dynamic.
The initial conditions simulation ensures that the system satisfies all constraints within the system. If
necessary, Adams/Solver moves parts until both parts of each joint are in contact. The simulation
involves three separate phases:
First, Adams/Solver makes the displacements between all parts and joints in the system
physically consistent. This requires the use of Newton-Raphson iteration to solve a set of
nonlinear algebraic equations. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG
statement in the Adams/Solver online help.)
Once the displacements are consistent, Adams/Solver makes the velocities physically consistent.
Because this requires solving a set of linear equations, iteration is not necessary.
Finally, Adams/Solver calculates consistent accelerations and forces. This solution also requires
Do the following:
Category
Error
572 Adams/View
Solver Settings - IC (Initial Conditions)
Do the following:
Specify the maximum translational increment Adams/Solver is to allow while
testing trial solutions during a solution step.
The default is 1.0E10 (no limit) and the range is Tlimit > 0.
Alimit
More
Maxit
Amaxit
Aerror
P - Z 573
Solver Settings - Kinematic
Do the following:
Category
Set to Kinematic.
Model
Error
Specifies the maximum displacement error Adams/Solver is to allow for each time
step.
The default is 1.0E-4 and the range is Error > 0.
Tlimit
Alimit
More
Maxit
Enter the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding the
displacements at a point in time.
The default is 25 and the range is Maxit > 0.
Aerror
Enter the maximum acceleration error Adams/Solver is to allow for each time step.
The default is 1.0E-4 and the range is Aerror > 0.
574 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Kinematic
Do the following:
Enter the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding
accelerations at a point in time.
The default is 25 and the range is Amaxit > 0.
Hmax
Enter the maximum time step that the kinematics solver is allowed to take.
The default is the output step size.
P - Z 575
Solver Settings - Optimizations
Do the following:
Category
Set to Optimization.
Algorithm
Specify the algorithm used to perform the optimization. The OPTDES algorithms
are provided with Adams/View. The DOT algorithms can be purchased from
Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. You can also include your own optimization algorithm.
The contact information for Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. is:
Vanderplaats R&D, Inc.
1767 S. 8th Street, Suite. 100
Colorado Springs, CO 80906
http://www.vrand.com/
http://www.vrand.com/dot.htm
Specify the limit below which subsequent differences of the objective must fall
before an optimization is considered successful. If the condition:
ABS(objective[now] - objective[now-1]) < convergence_tolerance is true for a
certain number of iterations (usually two), then the convergence tolerance criterion
is met. Note that this is only one test that is made by most optimization algorithms
before they terminate successfully.
Like other Adams/Solver tolerances, you may need to experiment with this
tolerance to find the right value for your application. Display the objective versus
iteration Strip chart. (See Solver Settings - Display) If the optimizer quits even
though the last iteration made noticeable progress, try reducing the tolerance. If the
optimizer continues iterating even after the objective has stopped changing very
much, make the tolerance larger.
Max. Iterations
Set how many iterations the optimization algorithm should take before it admits
failure. Note that a single iteration can have an arbitrarily large number of analysis
runs.
Rescale
Enter the number of iterations after which the design variable values are rescaled.
If you set the value to -1, scaling is turned off.
576 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Optimizations
Do the following:
Differencing
Control how the optimizer computes gradients for the design functions. Centered
differencing perturbs each design variable in the negative direction from the
nominal value, then again in the positive direction using finite differencing
between the perturbed results to compute the gradient. If you choose forward
differencing, each design variable is perturbed in a positive direction only.
Centered differencing can sometimes generate smoother, more reliable gradients
(especially in noisy models), but it causes twice as many analysis runs to be
performed.
More
Increment
The differencing increment specifies the size of increment to use when performing
finite differencing to compute gradients. When using forward differencing, this
value is added to the nominal value of each design variable on successive runs.
When using central differencing, this value is first subtracted from the nominal
value and then added to it.
Smaller increments may give more accurate approximations of the gradient, but are
also more susceptible to random variations from run to run. Larger increments help
minimize the effects of variations, but give less accurate gradients.
Debug
Set to display messages from the optimizer. Turning on debugging output sends
copious optimizer diagnostics to the window that launched Adams/View. Keep an
eye on that window anyway, as some important warnings might be written there.
The debugging output shows you the data the optimizer is receiving from
Adams/View, among other things. If the optimizer is behaving erratically, this may
help you determine the source of the problem.
User
Min. Converged
P - Z 577
Solver Settings - Output
Sets whether or not Adams/View stores Simulation results in three external files: graphics, request, and
results.
Selecting More lets you set options for the format and content of the results files, and the format and
content of the message and tabular output file when you are using External Adams/Solver. In addition,
you can set up how Adams/View stores the simulation results in the Modeling database.
To learn more, see the DEBUG statement in the Adams/Solver online help.
Do the following:
Category
Set to Output.
Save Files
Set to Yes to create Adams/Solver analysis files in the directory from which you
ran Adams/View. Adams/View saves the files after each simulation.
Prefix
After setting Save Files to Yes, enter the prefix you want added to the name of each
saved analysis file to help identify it.
Graphics
Request
Results
More
Output Category
Select what you'd like to set about the files. Click the output category to learn more
about its options.
Files
Database Storage
Results (.res) Options
Results (.res) Content
Output (Out) Content
Message (.msg) Content
Durability Files - For more information, see Adams/Durability online help.
578 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian
Specifies as many as ten character strings that together establish the pattern for evaluating the Jacobian
matrix during the modified Newton-Raphson solution for a dynamic, kinematic, or Initial conditions
simulation. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG statement in the
Adams/Solver online help.)
For each iteration, T or TRUE indicates that Adams/Solver is to evaluate the Jacobian, and F or FALSE
indicates that Adams/Solver is not to evaluate the Jacobian, instead it is to use the previously calculated
Jacobian matrix as an approximation of the current one. Therefore, cj determines whether or not
Adams/Solver is to evaluate the Jacobian at the jth iteration. If necessary, Adams/Solver repeats the
pattern of evaluations until it reaches the maximum number of iterations (set by the option Amaxit or
Maxit).
Do the following:
Category
Integrator Pattern
simulations.
T - Sets the pattern to all TRUEs, which evaluates the Jacobian at every
iteration.
F - Sets the pattern to all FALSEs. A pattern of all FALSEs implies that
More and setting options as explained below. Select More to see the
custom pattern. Not available until you created a custom pattern.
Tip:
More
Specify Pattern for Set the type of solution for which you are setting the Jacobian pattern.
Number of Entries Enter the number of TRUE's and FALSE's. The number of Ts or TRUEs and Fs
or FALSEs together must be at least one and no more than 10.
Pattern
P - Z 579
Sorting Settings
Sorting Settings
Tools Table Editor Sorting
Allows you to sort the type of objects and category information after you have set it up in the Filter menu
of the Table Editor.
You can sort the information by object name or by a particular column. You can set the type of sorting.
You can select:
Alphanumeric sorting - Sorts the information so that alphabetic characters are first followed by
numeric characters
Numeric sorting - Sorts objects based on their numeric values. It sorts any alphanumeric
characters as zeros.
Note:
When you sort the Table Editor, Adams/View sets the values displayed in cells back to
those stored in the Modeling database. Therefore, you lose any changes you made to cells
and did not apply to your modeling database.
Do the following:
Choose from:
No sorting - Object appear in the Table Editor in the order they are
characters as zero.
580 Adams/View
Sphere Tool
Sphere Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Sphere Tool
Creates a solid ellipsoid whose three radii are of equal length. You draw the sphere by indicating its center
point and the radius for the three radii.
Before you draw the sphere, you can also specify the radius value for the three radii
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the sphere to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the sphere to ground.
Tip:
Radius
Note:
P - Z 581
Spherical Joint Tool
Creates a spherical joint that allows the free rotation about a common point of one part with respect to
another part. The location of the spherical joint determines the point about which the joints parts can
pivot freely with respect to each other.
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
582 Adams/View
Spherical Joint Tool
Do the following:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit)/ Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
2 Bodies - 1 Location/
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
joint and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint
location. If there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View
connects the joint to that part and ground.
2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to
be connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint
remains fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to
be connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part.
You should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For
more on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see About Connecting
Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a
P - Z 583
Spline Tool
Spline Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Spline Tool
Creates a spline, which is a smooth curve that a set of location coordinates define.
You create splines by defining the locations of the coordinates that define the curve or by selecting an
existing geometric curve or edge and specifying the number of points to be used to define the spline. The
Spline tool produces a smooth curve through the points.
You can also close the spline or leave it open. A closed spline must be composed of at least eight points;
an open spline must be composed of at least four points.
Tip:
584 Adams/View
Spline Tool
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the spline to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the spline to ground.
Tip:
Closed
Select if you want to create a closed spline. Note that it must contain eight
points.
Tip:
Create by Picking
You can extrude a closed spline into solid geometry that has
mass. For more information, see the Extrusion Tool.
Select:
Points to select the locations on the screen where you want the spline
to pass through. You must specify at least eight locations for a closed
spline and four locations for an open spline.
Curve to select the curve to define the spline.
Edge to select the edge to define the edge.
If you selected Curve or Edge for Create by Picking, you have one additional option:
Spread Points
Set how many points you want used to define the curve or clear the selection
and let Adams/View calculate the number of points needed.
Note: If you are using this tool from the Main toolbox, the Spread Points text
box is called # of Points.
Note:
Adams/View places hotpoints at locations on the spline as you draw it. The hotpoints let
you reshape the spline. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see
Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also modify the spline by editing the point locations directly or by changing the
curve and matrix data elements that Adams/View creates to support the spline. In addition,
you can change the number of segments that Adams/View creates through the spline. For
more information on modifying splines, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify
Geometry.
P - Z 585
Split Tool
Split Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Split Tool
Splits a complex solid (often referred to as a CSG) that you created using the other Boolean tools back
into its primitive solids. It creates a part for each solid resulting from the split operation.
Learn about Splitting a Solid.
586 Adams/View
Static Equilibrium Tool
Performs a static simulation on your model. Adams/Solver iteratively repositions all the parts in an
attempt to balance all the forces for one particular point in time. Each static simulation is independent of
the time-varying effects of velocity and acceleration. Therefore, no inertial forces are taken into account.
A positioning of your parts for which all your forces balance is known as an equilibrium configuration.
If your force and motion inputs change over time and you want to investigate how your equilibrium
configurations change, you can choose to perform a series of static simulations over an interval of time.
A series of static simulations is often referred to as a quasi-static simulation because time is allowed to
vary between static simulations but time-varying inertial effects are neglected for each individual static
simulation. Quasi-static simulations are useful for approximating the dynamic response of models that
move very slowly and for which you can assume that the effects of inertial force can be neglected.
Since Adams/Solver must be able to move parts around as it attempts to iterate to an equilibrium
configuration, it does not make sense to perform a static simulation on a model that has no Degrees of
freedom (DOF). If the model has no DOF, no parts are allowed to move.
Learn about Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations.
P - Z 587
Stereo Viewing
Stereo Viewing
Settings Stereo Viewing
Sets options for using Adams/View with stereo viewing. Stereo viewing is available on all Linux
platforms but not Windows.
Before running Adams/View in stereo-viewing mode, you need to set the MDI_STEREO environment
variable MDI_STEREO (setenv MDI_STEREO 1). Learn more about setting Adams/View Environment
Variables.
Stereo viewing is only available when running Native OpenGL graphics with the
OpenGL_Software_Assisted registry setting set to disabled. You use the Registry Editor.
To set this registry setting:
1. From the Adams Toolbar, right-click the Toolbar tool
of viewing is used with non-stereo- ready hardware and splits the screen into two halfs, a top half
and bottom half. The result is that the screen size in pixels is effectively cut in half in the vertical
direction. For example, on a monitor set for a screen size 1024 x 768 pixels, the screen size
changes to 1024 x 384. This changes the aspect ratio of the screen and of the resulting images
displayed within Adams/View and Adams/PostProcessor. They appear to be one half as tall as
they should be.
Interlaced stereo viewing - The second type of viewing is Interlaced stereo viewing, which is
available on stereo-capable graphics cards. This approach has the advantage that the screen
aspect ratio is not changed and, therefore, the resulting images maintain the same proportions
has their non-stereo counterparts. To enable this mode in the current Adams code, the video
format for the monitor must be set to a format that supports interlaced stereo viewing. To do this,
use the SGI setmon(1) shell command. For example, on a SGI tezro machine with a V12
graphics card, you could use the following command:
/usr/gfx/setmon -n 1280x1024_100s
For the option:
Do the following:
Stereo viewing
Depth of Field
Eye Separation
Slide to control of offset between the left and right modeling views.
588 Adams/View
Stereo Viewing
Do the following:
Control the type of parallax view used to display the model:
Positive - Positive parallax viewing produces images that appear to be
within the space of the monitor. For engineering purposes where objects
are often cut off by the window borders or partially obscured by dialog
boxes, positive parallax viewing produces images that are less confusing
to the viewer and are, therefore, easier to view.
Negative - Negative parallax viewing produces images that appear to float
in space in front of the display. Viewing floating images that are partially
obscured by interface items produces confusing cues to the viewer. While
the image appears in front of the screen, the interface items appear to be on
the screen but these interface items can obscure part of the image. These
conflicting inputs can be confusing and lead to extra strain.
Eye Position
Use with Negative parallax viewing and use it to control how far the image floats
in front of the screen.
P - Z 589
Summing Junction Block
Summing junction blocks add or subtract the outputs from other standard blocks. You can select whether
the positive or negative value of an input to a summing junction is used by single-clicking on the +/- sign
button.
A summing junction block takes any valid controls block output as its input.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input 1/
Input 2
Specify the assembly name of any controls block, including input function blocks,
in either text box. You can select whether the positive or negative value of the input
to a summing junction is used by single-clicking on the +/- sign button. Single-click
on the +/- button to select whether the positive or negative value of an input to a
summing junction is used.
Check the inputs to the function block.
590 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for an external system
Lets you substitute an existing flexible body in your model for an external system.
To substitute a flexible body for an external system, use the following tabs:
Alignment
Connections
Alignment
For the option:
Do the following:
Flexible Body
External System
Select either:
An existing external system in the model
Or Create an external system on the fly
The button can be used to invoke the External System Cremod dialog,
in order to create an external system as a replacement for the rigid body.
Note:
Select to align the external system by comparing the center of mass and inertia
tensor of the two bodies. The external system is:
Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects either
by increments or to precise coordinates.
P - Z 591
Swap a flexible body for an external system
Do the following:
3 Point Method
Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the
external system. A point pair consists of a point on the original flexible body
and a point on replacement external system. The three points on each body
must uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the
flexible body and the second and third points define the orientation. The
external system is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is
then oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the External System reside in the
plane defined by points 2 and 3 on the flexible body.
Flip about
direction.
Y axis - Rotate external system 180 about its second largest principal
inertia direction.
Z axis - Rotate external system 180 about its smallest principal
inertia direction.
View parts only
Select to display only the flexible body and its replacement external system.
View topology
Leave a copy of the flexible body in the modeling database. This is helpful if
you want to reactivate the flexible body.
Connections
For the
option:
Do the following:
Update Table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you have made.
Reset Table
Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder
Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node
ID/Apply
Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the
Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to
node
Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the
location of the specified node.
Preserve
expression
Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker
and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams/View
expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.
592 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for an external system
For the
option:
Preserve
location
Do the following:
Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node
table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams/Flex preserves the
offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker. It keeps the
joint from breaking.
Note:
Number of
digits
Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and
Node table.
P - Z 593
Swap a flexible body for an external system
For the
option:
Sort by
Do the following:
Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns. For
example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its selected
node.
Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name
Connections - Sort by markers with connections
Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node
Interface - Sort by interface nodes
Distance - Sort by markers that are most distant from the selected node
Move - Sort by the values in the Move column
594 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for an external system
For the
option:
Marker and
Node Table
Do the following:
Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be
transferred on the replacement external system. See the Picture of Marker and Node
Table. Note that if a marker is attached to more than one node, the marker is listed in
the table for each node to which it is attached. You need to change the marker
individually for each of the nodes.
Marker - All the markers on the flexible body that will be transferred to the
external system.
Connections - All the forces and joints on the flexible body that use the marker
for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the external
system.
Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement external
system.
Interface - The existing or replacement node may or may not be an interface
to the external system. When Adams/Flex initially creates the table, it chooses
the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.
New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node
options are:
move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the external system, it
will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be
moved is given in the Distance column.
loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the marker's
P - Z 595
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Lets you substitute an existing flexible body in your model for another flexible body. The name of the
replacement flexible body is the name of the existing body with _flex appended to it.
Learn more about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.
To substitute a flexible body for a flexible body, you use the following tabs:
Alignment
Connections
Alignment
For the option:
Flexible Body
MNF File/
MD DB file
Do the following:
Enter the flexible body to be replaced.
Select the Modal Neutral File (MNF) containing the replacement
flexible body.
MD DB File, and then select the name of the MD DB to import. The
The parameter applies only, when the user is creating a flexible body out of
the MD DB. The parameter specifies the index of the flexible body in the
specified MD DB. The parameter is optional. If not specified, it is assumed
to have the value 1.
Note:
The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the displayed
list.
596 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Do the following:
Select to align the flexible body by comparing the center of mass and inertia
tensor of the two bodies. The flexible body is:
Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects either
by increments or to precise coordinates.
3 Point Method
Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the
flexible body. A point pair consists of a point on the original flexible body
and a point on replacement flexible body. The three points on each body must
uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the
flexible body and the second and third points define the orientation. The
flexible body is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then
oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the flexible body reside in the plane
defined by points 2 and 3 on the original flexible body.
Flip about
Only available if you used Align Flex Body CM with CM of Current Part.
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:
X axis - Rotate flexible body 180 about its largest principal inertia
direction
Y axis - Rotate flexible body 180 about its second largest principal
inertia direction
Z axis - Rotate flexible body 180 about its smallest principal inertia
direction
View parts only
Select to display only the original flexible body and its replacement.
View topology
Leave a copy of the original flexible body in the modeling database. This is
helpful if you want to reactivate the original flexible body.
P - Z 597
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Connections
For the
option:
Do the following:
Update Table
Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you've made.
Reset Table
Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder
Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node
ID/Apply
Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the
Move to node
Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the
location of the specified node.
Preserve
expression
Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker
and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams/View
expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.
Preserve
location
Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and
Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams/Flex
preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker.
It keeps the joint from breaking.
Note:
Number of
digits
Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and
Node table.
598 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
For the
option:
Sort by
Do the following:
Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns.
For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its
selected node.
Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name.
Connections - Sort by those markers with connections.
Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node.
Interface - Sort by those nodes that are interface nodes.
Distance - Sort by those markers the most distant from the selected node.
Move - Sort by the values in the Move column.
P - Z 599
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
For the
option:
Marker and
Node Table
Do the following:
Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be
transferred on the replacement flexible body. See a Picture of Marker and Node Table.
Note that if a marker is attached to more than one node, the marker is listed in the table
for each node to which it is attached. You need to change the marker individually for
each of the nodes.
Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the
flexible body.
Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the marker
for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the flexible
body.
Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement flexible
body.
Interface - Whether or not the existing or replacement node is an interface
to the flexible body. When Adams/Flex initially creates the table, it chooses
the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.
New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment
options are:
move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the flexible body, it
will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be
moved is given in the Distance column.
loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the marker's
600 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for an external system
Alignment
For the option:
Do the following:
Current Part
External System
Select either:
An existing external system in the model
Or Create an external system on the fly
Select to align the external system by comparing the center of mass and
inertia tensor of the two bodies. The external system is:
Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects
either by increments or to precise coordinates.
P - Z 601
Swap a rigid body for an external system
Do the following:
3 Point Method
Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of
the external system. A point pair consists of a point on the original rigid
body and a point on replacement external system. The three points on each
body must uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location
of the rigid body and the second and third points define the orientation. The
external system is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It
is then oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the External System reside in
the plane defined by points 2 and 3 on the rigid body.
Flip about
inertia direction.
Y axis - Rotate external system 180 about its second largest
inertia direction.
View parts only
Select to display only the rigid body and its replacement external system.
View topology
Leave a copy of the rigid body in the modeling database. This is helpful if
you want to reactivate the rigid body.
Connections
For the option:
Do the following:
Update table
Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you have made.
Reset table
Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder
Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node ID/Apply
Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of
the Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to node
Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to
the location of the specified node.
602 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for an external system
Do the following:
Preserve expression Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the
Marker and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through
Adams/View expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized
position.
Preserve location
Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker
and Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node,
Adams/Flex preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint
location on the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.
Number of digits
Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the
Marker and Node table.
P - Z 603
Swap a rigid body for an external system
Do the following:
Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the
columns. For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most
distant from its selected node.
Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name
Connections - Sort by markers with connections
Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node
Interface - Sort by interface nodes
Distance - Sort by markers most distant from the selected node
Move - Sort by the values in the Move column
604 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for an external system
Do the following:
Displays the markers on the external system and the node to which the marker
will be transferred on the replacement external system.
Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the
external system.
Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the
marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to
the external system.
Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is
it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will
be moved is given in the Distance column.
loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the
P - Z 605
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
Lets you substitute a rigid body for an Adams/Flex flexible body. The name of the replacement flexible
body is the name of the existing body with _flex appended to it.
Learn more about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.
To substitute a rigid body for a flexible body, you use the following tabs:
Alignment
Connections
Alignment
For the option:
Current Part
Do the following:
Enter the rigid body to be replaced.
For template-based products: Enter the general part to be replaced. If the
general part has a symmetric brother (counterpart), both the left/right
general parts will be set to asymmetric, and only the general part specified
will be made flexible.
Flex Body/
MNF File/
MD DB File
Select either:
Flex Body, and then select a flexible body that already exists.
MNF File, and then select the name of the MNF to import.
MD DB File, and then select the name of the MD DB to import.
The parameter applies only, when the user is creating a flexible body out
of the MD DB. The parameter specifies the index of the flexible body in
the specified MD DB. The parameter is optional. If not specified, it is
assumed to have the value 1.
Note:
The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the
displayed list.
606 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
Do the following:
The load button needs to be/can be used only when the user specifies a MD
DB option, to create the replacement flexible body from. Pressing the load
button, after specifying a valid MD DB file (and index if specified), loads
the appropriate flexible body from the MD DB.
For the flex-body and MNF option, the load button stays disabled and
cannot be used.
Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects
either by increments or to precise coordinates.
3 Point Method
Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of
the flexible body. A point pair consists of a point on the rigid body and a
point on the flexible body. The three points on each body must uniquely
define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the flexible body
and the second and third points define the orientation. The flexible body is
positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then oriented by
making points 2 and 3 on the flexible body reside in the plane defined by
points 2 and 3 on the rigid body.
Flip about
Only available if you used Align Flex Body CM with CM of Current Part.
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:
X axis - Rotate flexible body 180 about its largest principal
inertia direction
Y axis - Rotate flexible body 180 about its second largest
inertia direction
P - Z 607
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
Do the following:
Select to display only the rigid body and the replacement flexible body.
View Topology
Leave a copy of the original rigid body in the modeling database. This is
helpful if you want to reactivate the rigid body.
For template-based products: The original part is always copied.
Connections
For the option:
Do the following:
Update table
Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you've made.
Reset table
Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder
Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node ID/Apply
Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row
of the Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to node
Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table
to the location of the specified node.
Preserve expression
Preserve location
Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the
Marker and Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment
node, Adams/Flex preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined
a joint location on the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.
Note:
Number of digits
Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the
Marker and Node table.
608 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
Do the following:
Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the
columns. For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most
distant from its selected node.
Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name.
Connections - Sort by those markers with connections.
Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node.
Interface - Sort by those nodes that are interface nodes.
Distance - Sort by those markers the most distant from the
selected node.
Move - Sort by the values in the Move column.
P - Z 609
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
Do the following:
Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the
marker will be transferred on the replacement flexible body.
Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred
the marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be
transferred to the flexible body.
Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is
body, it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the
marker will be moved is given in the Distance column.
loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the
610 Adams/View
Switch Block
Switch Block
Build Controls Toolkit Standard Control Blocks New/Modify
The switch is a convenient means to zero the signal into any block. Connect the switch at a point in the
feedback loop to quickly see the change from open loop control to closed loop control. The switch takes
any control block as its input.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input
Close Switch
P - Z 611
Table Editor
Table Editor
Tools Table Editor
Allows you to enter values for all types of objects. It displays the objects in your Modeling database in
table format so you can compare, update, and manage the objects. The object information you can view
and update depends on the type of object. You can create and delete object.
To set the type of objects displayed:
Select a check box of the desired object type from along the bottom of the Table Editor.
Adams/View updates the Table Editor to display the selected type of object.
Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
Do the following:
Select to insert the text in the input cell into the selected cell.
(Insert tool)
Select to insert text from the input cell into the selected cells.
(Object Name & Field tool) Select to insert the database name for the next selected cell into the
input box. Learn about entering database names into cells.
Select to insert the self-reference operator into the input cell. Learn
about entering modifying cells based on their current contents.
Input cell
Enter text to add to more than one cell at a time and quickly update the
values in the cell. Learn more about Working with Cells in the Table
Editor.
Apply
OK
Click to execute the object table's commands and close the Table
Editor.
Create
Filters
Sorting
Write
Reload
Select to reload the values in the database into the Table Editor.
612 Adams/View
Table Editor Filters
Narrows the display of objects in Table Editor based on an objects name or parent, such as to display
only markers that belong to PART_1, which is called setting the scope. You can also narrow the display
based on the names of objects. For example, you can set the name filter to only display the names of
objects that contain the number 2 (MARKER_20, MARKER_21, and so on). Using the scope and name
filter together, you can focus on those objects of interest and filter out the rest.
The categories of information that you can display about an object depend on the type of object. For
example, for parts, you can display their location, initial conditions, and attributes, such as whether they
are visible or active in the current Simulation. For markers, you can view their locations, as well as their
locations relative to ground. For forces, you cannot change the information displayed, only the types of
forces displayed. For joints, you can change the information displayed as well as the type of joints
displayed.
Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
Do the following:
You can limit the scope of the search, if you want, to all objects beneath a
particular object in the database hierarchy by entering the name of the object.
For example, enter .model_1 to display all objects under your entire model or
enter .model_1.PART_3 to display objects belonging only to PART_3.
Note:
Name Filter
Enter the name of the object or objects that you want to display. Type any
wildcards that you want included. By default, Adams/View displays all objects
that meet the scope entered in the previous step regardless of their name.
Select the categories of information or set the type of object that you want displayed and then select
OK.
P - Z 613
Three-Component Force tool
Creates a translational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.
Learn more about:
Multi-Component Forces
Do the following:
Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Force, the following option appears:
Force Value
614 Adams/View
Three-Component Force tool
Do the following:
Translational K
Translational C
P - Z 615
Three-Component Torque tool
Creates a rotational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.
Learn more about:
Multi-Component Forces
Do the following:
Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
a default value.
Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant , the following option appears:
Torque
616 Adams/View
Three-Component Torque tool
Do the following:
KT
CT
P - Z 617
Tool Settings
Tool Settings
View Toolbox and Toolbars
Turns on and off the Model Browser, Ribbon Capability and Standard toolbar. You can also set where the
model browser and status toolbars appear. By default, the model browser appears at the left of the main
window and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.
Do the following:
Model Browser
Ribbon
Status toolbar
618 Adams/View
Tool Settings (Classic)
Turns on and off the Main toolbox and the Standard toolbar and Status bars. You can also set where the
Standard and status toolbars appeareither at the top of thes main window under the menu bar or at the
bottom of the window. By default, the Main toolbox appears at the left of the main window, the Standard
toolbar is turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.
Do the following:
Main toolbox
Standard toolbar
Status toolbar
P - Z 619
Toolbar Settings
Toolbar Settings
View Toolbars Settings
Allows you to turn the display of toolbars on and off. The toolbars are:
Main toolbar - The Main toolbar appears by default. It contains tools for setting options and
status bar displays the number of the displayed page and the total number of pages.
You can also set where the toolbars appeareither at the top of the window under the menu bar or at the
bottom of the window. You can also turn on and off the dashboard and treeview. By default, the dashboard
and treeview are displayed, the Main toolbar appears at the top of the window, the Curve Edit and
Statistics toolbars are turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.
Do the following:
Select which toolbars you want visible. The changes take place
immediately.
Top
Select if you want the toolbar placed at the top of your screen.
Treeview
Dashboard
620 Adams/View
Topology By Connections
Topology By Connections
Database Navigator Topology By Connections
Allows you to display information about a selected constraint or force with the parts that they connect
and act on.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
The option:
Save to File
P - Z 621
Topology By Parts
Topology By Parts
Database Navigator Topology By Parts
Allows you to display information about a selected part of your model. It displays information of the
selected part and shows its connections to other parts.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
The option:
Save to File
622 Adams/View
Torsion SpringTool
Torsion SpringTool
Build Forces Torsion SpringTool
Do the following:
Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes
of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector
you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams/View automatically
calculates the x- and y-axes.
KT
CT
P - Z 623
Torus Tool
Torus Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Torus Tool
Creates a solid circular ring. You draw the ring from the center outward. By default, the Torus tool makes
the radius of outer ring (minor radius) 25% of the inner ring (major radius).
You can also specify the minor and major radii before you draw.
Learn about Creating a Torus.
Do the following:
Select either:
New Part - Creates a new part.
Add to Part - Adds the torus to another part in your model.
On Ground - Adds the torus to ground.
Tip:
Minor Radius
If desired, select and enter the inner radius for the torus.
Major Radius
If desired, select and enter the outer radius for the torus.
624 Adams/View
Torus Tool
Note:
Two hotpoints appear on a torus after you draw it. One controls the centerline of the torus
circular shape and the other controls the radius of the circular cross-section. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
P - Z 625
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File
Translates either:
MSC.Nastran output data into a Modal Neutral File (MNF) using the MSC.Nastran-Adams
Interface. You generate the output data by running MSC.Nastran first and then running the
MSC.Nastran
For the option:
Do the following:
OUTPUT2 File Name Enter the name of the output (.out) file that you generated by running
MSC.Nastran with the AdamsMNF Case Control command or a special
DMAP alter. Learn about generating output. The MCS.Nastran translator
generates the MNF file based on the .out file name.
Invariants
Set which inertia invariants should be computed and stored in the MNF. You
can select:
Fast Set - If you select Fast Set, Adams/Flex does not compute
626 Adams/View
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File
Do the following:
Do one of the following:
To preserve the units in the original MNF, select Original. If you
kilogram, seconds, and Newtons, select SI. This is the optimal setting
for processing flexible bodies in Adams/View.
Formatting
Remove Internal Solid Select to remove certain interior geometry, such as the mated faces of two brick
Element Geometry
elements, to enhance graphics performance. When used with invariants
computation (explained above), removing interior geometry can significantly
reduce the size of an MNF.
P - Z 627
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File
Do the following:
Select the tab Automatic, and then select Remove Internal Solid Element
Geometry.
When you remove the interior geometry, the graphics performance of
Adams/View is greatly enhanced. When you remove both interior geometry
and calculate the invariants, Adams/Flex removes nodes that were only
connected to the geometry that it also removed. Occasionally, the removal of
the geometry may be undesirable especially when a particular interior node is
to be the target for an attachment in Adams.
Apply Mesh
Select and then use the sliders to set the following:
Coarsening Algorithm
Target Mesh Resolution - Slide the Mesh Resolution slider to the
fraction of the total component size below which Adams/Flex removes
the detail of the mesh. For example, if your component is
approximately 1 m long, and you select 15% mesh resolution, the
coarsening results in a mesh with 15 cm-wide mesh cells.
Face Smoothing - Slide the Face Smoothing slider to the angle
Do the following:
Universal File
Enter the name of the Universal file containing datasets 15, 55, 82.
I-DEAS/CADAX/STAR
Specifies the program from which the Universal file was generated.
MNF File
Enter the name of the MNF to be created. If you do not provide a file
name, Adams/Flex generates an MNF with the same path and prefix as
the Universal file.
Total Mass
628 Adams/View
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File
Center of Mass
Inertia Tensor
Enter the inertia tensor of the tested component relative to the center of
mass.
Title
Comment #1/ Comment #2/ Enter comments for the MNF to help you identify it (optional).
Comment #3
Length/Mass/Time/Force
Units
Set Length Units, Mass Units, Time Units, and Force Units to, Mass
Units, Time Units, and Force Units toto the units used in the Universal
file and the data entered in this dialog box.
P - Z 629
Translate Tool Stack
Contains tools for translating the view in the View window and setting the perspective.
Icon
Link
Dynamically Translating a View
630 Adams/View
Translational Joint Tool
Creates a translational joint that allows one part to translate along a vector with respect to another part.
The parts can only translate, not rotate, with respect to each other.
When you create a translational joint, you specify its location and orientation. The location of a
translational joint does not affect the motion of the joint. It simply determines where Adams/View places
the joint. The orientation of the translational joint, however, determines the direction of the axis along
which the parts can slide with respect to each other. The direction of the motion of the translational joint
is parallel to the orientation vector and passes through the location.
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
P - Z 631
Translational Joint Tool
Do the following:
Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see About Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/
Pick Geometry Feature
632 Adams/View
Translational Motion Tool
Moves the first part that the joint connects along the z-axis of the second part.
Learn about:
Overview of Motion
Creating Joint Motion
Do the following:
Specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By default,
Adams/View creates a translational motion with a speed of 10 millimeters per
second. To enter a function expression or User-written subroutine, right-click the
Trans. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder to
display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on using the Function
Builder, see Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.
P - Z 633
Translational Spring Damper Tool
Adds a translational spring damper to your model by defining the locations on two parts between which
the spring-damper acts. You define the action force that is applied to the first location, and Adams/Solver
automatically applies the equal and opposite reaction force to the second location.
Learn about:
Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers
Translational Spring Dampers
Do the following:
Translational K
Translational C
634 Adams/View
Unite Tool
Unite Tool
Build Bodies/Geometry Unite Tool
Creates complex geometry by joining two intersecting solids. It merges the second part you select into
the first part, resulting in a single part.
The union has a mass computed from the volume of the new solid. Any overlapping volume is only
counted once.
Learn about Creating One Part from the Union of Two Solids
P - Z 635
Units
Units
Settings Units
Changes the default units Adams/View uses in modeling, importing, and exporting files. You can select
individual units or select a set group of units.
Learn about:
Units of Measurement in Adams/View
Unit Labels
Entering Unit Measurements in Text Boxes
Do the following:
Length
Mass
Force
Time
Angle
Frequency
MMKS
Select to set length to millimeters, mass to kilograms, and force to Newtons. When
you select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion
of the dialog box.
MKS
Select to set length to meters, mass to kilograms, and force to Newtons. When you
select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion of the
dialog box.
CGS
Select to set length to centimeters, mass to grams, and force to Dyne. When you
select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion of the
dialog box.
IPS
Select to set length to inches, mass to pound mass, and force to PoundForce. When
you select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion
of the dialog box.
Note:
636 Adams/View
Update Design Variables
Allows you to set the design variable values to those of a trial or iteration. This is helpful if you want to:
Update your model to match the best trial of a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE).
Visualize the variable settings of a particular trial or iteration.
Use an intermediate iteration in an optimization instead of the final values.
Do the following:
Result Set
Enter the name of the parametric analysis result set that you want to use to update
the variables.
Trial
Enter the trial or iteration number you want to use. Adams/View sets the design
variable values to match those used in the specified trial or iteration, and updates
the model graphics to reflect the new values.
P - Z 637
User-Defined Transfer Function Block
The user-defined transfer function block creates general rational polynomial blocks by specifying the
polynomial coefficients. Specify the coefficients in the order n0, n1, n2 for the numerator.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input.
Do the following:
Name
Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input
Numerator
Coefficients/
Denominator
Coefficients
638 Adams/View
View Accessories
View Accessories
View View Accessories
Sets the display of the following in the currently active View window:
Working grid
Screen icons
View triad
View title
Note:
You can also use the tools in the Main toolbox to set the display of these items. If you use
the tools, you can change the accessories for all view windows at once but you cannot
change the view title.
Do the following:
Working grid
Screen icons
View triad
View title
P - Z 639
View Orientation Tools
Provide seven pre-set views of your model that you can display in any of your view windows. You can
access the pre-set views using the Pre-set command on the View menu or using the set of View Orientation
Tool Stacks on the Main toolbox.
Learn about:
The different Orientations and the tools that activate them
Changing the View in a Window
640 Adams/View
View Rotation
View Rotation
Main toolbox Toggle toolstack View Rotation
Rotates the View in a View window about the x, y, and z screen axes by a specified increment.
Icon
Description
Rotate view about the screens z-axis
Set the amount by which you want to incrementally rotate the view in the text box.
P - Z 641
Welcome
Welcome
Lets you start your Adams session by creating a new model or opening an existing one. It also lets you
to specify your working directory.
Do the following:
How would you like to Sets how you will proceed with Adams/View:
proceed?
New Model - Lets you start a new modeling session with a new
modeling database.
Existing Model - Lets you open an existing model.
Exit - Lets you exit Adams/View without performing an
operation.
Enter the name you want assigned to the new Model. You can enter up to 80
alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as
spaces or periods.
Gravity
Select the gravity settings for the new model. You can select:
Earth Normal - Sets the gravity to 1 G downward.
No Gravity - Turns off the gravitational force.
Other - Lets you set the gravity as desired. The Gravity Settings
dialog box appears after you select OK on the Welcome dialog box.
Learn about Specifying Gravitational Force.
Units
Select a preset unit system for your model. In all the preset unit systems, time
is in seconds and angles are in degrees. You can set:
MMKS - Sets length to millimeter, mass to kilogram, and force to
Newton.
MKS - Sets length to meter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.
CGS - Sets length to centimeter, mass to gram, and force to Dyne.
IPS - Sets length to inch, mass to slug, and force to PoundForce.
If you do not want any of the preset unit systems, you can change the units as
required. Learn about Setting Units of Measurement.
Working Directory
642 Adams/View
Welcome
Do the following:
Specify the file name you wish to open. Use the browse option to locate the
files.
Working Directory
P - Z 643
Welcome (Classic Interface)
Lets you create a new Modeling database or use an existing one. It also lets you import modeling data
and specify your working directory. Learn about creating a modeling database.
Do the following:
How would you like to Sets how you will proceed with Adams/View:
proceed?
Create a new model - Lets you start a new modeling session with a
new modeling database.
Open an existing database - Lets you open an existing modeling
database.
Import a file - Lets you start a new modeling session by reading in a
model from an Adams/View command file or an Adams/Solver
dataset. For more information, see:
Import - Adams/Solver Dataset
Import - Adams/View Command Files
Exit - Lets you exit Adams/View without performing an operation.
Start in
Model name
Enter the name you want assigned to the new Model. You can enter up to 80
alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as
spaces or periods.
644 Adams/View
Welcome (Classic Interface)
Do the following:
Select the gravity settings for the new model. You can select:
Earth Normal - Sets the gravity to 1 G downward.
No Gravity - Turns off the gravitational force.
Other - Lets you set the gravity as desired. The Gravity Settings
dialog box appears after you select OK on the Welcome dialog box.
Learn about Specifying Gravitational Force.
Units
Select a preset unit system for your model. In all the preset unit systems, time
is in seconds and angles are in degrees. You can set:
MMKS - Sets length to millimeter, mass to kilogram, and force to
Newton.
MKS - Sets length to meter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.
CGS - Sets length to centimeter, mass to gram, and force to Dyne.
IPS - Sets length to inch, mass to slug, and force to PoundForce.
If you do not want any of the preset unit systems, you can change the units as
required. Learn about Setting Units of Measurement.
P - Z 645
Window Layout
Window Layout
View Layout
Main toolbox Window Layouts toolstack
Provides 12 View window layouts for the Main window. The layouts vary from a single view window of
your model up to six windows. Each window displays a different view of your model. Adams/Views
displays the current model (if there is one) into any of the views that are empty.
646 Adams/View
Window Layout
You select the layout youd like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window
Layouts tool stack on the Main toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts.
If you display the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.
Do the following:
Any of layout choices Select the choice to change the view window to your desired layout.
Close
Select to close the palette. You can keep it open to quickly switch between
layouts.
P - Z 647
Working Grid
Working Grid
Settings Working Grid
Main tool box Move toolstack
Sets the appearance of various elements in the Working grid and toggle their visibility.
.
Do the following:
Rectangular
648 Adams/View
Working Grid
Do the following:
Polar
Size
For a rectangular grid only, enter the size of the grid in the x and y
directions in length units.
Spacing
For a rectangular grid only, enter the spacing between each point in the
grid in the x and y directions in length units.
Maximum Radius
For polar grid only, enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to
its outermost circle.
Circle Spacing
For polar grid only, enter the amount of space between each circle in the
working grid. The smaller the spacing, the more circles Adams/View
defines.
P - Z 649
Working Grid
Do the following:
For polar grid only, enter the number of lines radiating from the origin of
the working grid. Adams/View spaces the lines equally around the working
grid. The lines do not include the axes. The number of lines (N) determines
the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in the formula:
= 360/N
In the picture above 8 lines are specified for an angle increment
between the lines of 45.
Select the color and weight (thickness) of each object in the grid. You can
also set the color of the objects to Contrast, which indicates that
Adams/View should select a color that contrasts with the color currently set
for the view background. Setting the color to Contrast is particularly helpful
when you set each of your view windows to a different background color or
when you frequently change the view background.
The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided
for setting the color of objects. The colors do not include any new colors
that you created.
The weight values are from 1 to 3 screen pixels.
Set Location
Select either:
Global Origin to set the center location of the working grid to the
working grid.
Set Orientation
Select how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation
by picking points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you
select Pick for orientation, you will also set the location of the working grid.
650 Adams/View
Working Grid